[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2010061674A1 - Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure device, and device manufacturing method - Google Patents

Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure device, and device manufacturing method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2010061674A1
WO2010061674A1 PCT/JP2009/065309 JP2009065309W WO2010061674A1 WO 2010061674 A1 WO2010061674 A1 WO 2010061674A1 JP 2009065309 W JP2009065309 W JP 2009065309W WO 2010061674 A1 WO2010061674 A1 WO 2010061674A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
substrate
dimming
light
unit
correction unit
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2009/065309
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
幸二 重松
範夫 三宅
裕久 田中
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Nikon Corp
Original Assignee
Nikon Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Nikon Corp filed Critical Nikon Corp
Publication of WO2010061674A1 publication Critical patent/WO2010061674A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70058Mask illumination systems
    • G03F7/70191Optical correction elements, filters or phase plates for controlling intensity, wavelength, polarisation, phase or the like
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/70Microphotolithographic exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/70058Mask illumination systems
    • G03F7/70091Illumination settings, i.e. intensity distribution in the pupil plane or angular distribution in the field plane; On-axis or off-axis settings, e.g. annular, dipole or quadrupole settings; Partial coherence control, i.e. sigma or numerical aperture [NA]
    • G03F7/701Off-axis setting using an aperture

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a correction unit, an illumination optical system, an exposure apparatus, and a device manufacturing method. More specifically, the present invention relates to an illumination optical system suitable for an exposure apparatus for manufacturing a device such as a semiconductor element, an imaging element, a liquid crystal display element, and a thin film magnetic head in a lithography process.
  • a secondary light source (generally an illumination pupil), which is a substantial surface light source composed of a number of light sources, passes through a fly-eye lens as an optical integrator.
  • a predetermined light intensity distribution the light intensity distribution in the illumination pupil is referred to as “pupil intensity distribution”.
  • the illumination pupil is a position where the illumination surface becomes the Fourier transform plane of the illumination pupil by the action of the optical system between the illumination pupil and the illumination surface (a mask or a wafer in the case of an exposure apparatus). Defined.
  • the light from the secondary light source is condensed by the condenser lens and then illuminates the mask on which a predetermined pattern is formed in a superimposed manner.
  • the light transmitted through the mask forms an image on the wafer via the projection optical system, and the mask pattern is projected and exposed (transferred) onto the wafer.
  • the pattern formed on the mask is highly integrated, and it is indispensable to obtain a uniform illuminance distribution on the wafer in order to accurately transfer this fine pattern onto the wafer.
  • an annular or multipolar (bipolar, quadrupolar, etc.) pupil intensity distribution is formed to improve the depth of focus and resolution of the projection optical system.
  • the technique to make it is proposed (refer patent document 1).
  • the pupil intensity distribution is adjusted to the desired shape, but also the pupil intensity distribution for each point on the wafer as the final irradiated surface is almost uniform. It is necessary to adjust to. If there is a variation in the uniformity of the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the wafer, the line width of the pattern varies from position to position on the wafer, and the fine pattern of the mask has the desired line width over the entire exposure area. It cannot be faithfully transferred onto the wafer.
  • the pattern may be displaced from the desired position and burned.
  • the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide an illumination optical system capable of adjusting the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the irradiated surface almost uniformly.
  • the present invention also provides an exposure apparatus that can perform good exposure under appropriate illumination conditions using an illumination optical system that adjusts the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the irradiated surface substantially uniformly. The purpose is to provide.
  • the present invention provides an illumination optical system capable of adjusting a light intensity difference between a pair of regions spaced apart in a predetermined direction across an optical axis in a pupil intensity distribution related to each point on an irradiated surface. With the goal. Further, the present invention provides an appropriate illumination using an illumination optical system that adjusts the light intensity difference between a pair of regions spaced in a predetermined direction across the optical axis in the pupil intensity distribution for each point on the irradiated surface. An object of the present invention is to provide an exposure apparatus capable of performing good exposure under conditions.
  • a correction unit for correcting a pupil intensity distribution formed on an illumination pupil of an illumination optical system It is arranged in the illumination pupil space between the optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and the optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil, and is arranged on the optical axis of the illumination optical system.
  • the first substrate has a first dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
  • the second substrate has a second dimming pattern formed corresponding to the first dimming pattern on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
  • the relative position of the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern can be changed, The dimming rate due to the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern changes according to a change in the relative position between the first substrate and the second substrate and a change in the incident angle of light on the first substrate.
  • the correction unit is configured to be configured to provide a correction unit.
  • a correction unit for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil of the illumination optical system A first perpendicular to the optical axis of the illumination optical system in an illumination pupil space between an optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and an optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil.
  • a correction unit for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil of the illumination optical system It is arranged in an illumination pupil space between an optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and an optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil, and is arranged on the optical axis of the illumination optical system.
  • the first substrate has a first dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
  • the second substrate has a second dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
  • the first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming region;
  • the second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming region formed corresponding to the at least one first unit dimming region,
  • the first substrate and the second substrate are configured to be relatively movable along a first direction crossing the optical axis.
  • the correction unit is provided.
  • a correction unit for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil of the illumination optical system It is arranged in an illumination pupil space between an optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and an optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil, and is arranged on the optical axis of the illumination optical system.
  • the first substrate has a first dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
  • the second substrate has a second dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
  • the first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming region;
  • the second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming region formed corresponding to the at least one first unit dimming region,
  • the first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region give a first dimming rate to light incident on the first unit dimming region at a first incident angle, and Giving a second light attenuation rate different from the first light attenuation rate to light incident at a second incident angle different from the first angle of incidence on the one unit light attenuation region
  • a distribution forming optical system having an optical integrator and forming a pupil intensity distribution in an illumination pupil on the rear side of the optical integrator;
  • An illumination optical system comprising: a correction unit according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments arranged in the illumination pupil space including the rear illumination pupil.
  • a distribution forming optical system having an optical integrator and forming a pupil intensity distribution in an illumination pupil on the rear side of the optical integrator;
  • the optical integrator has an elongated rectangular unit wavefront dividing surface along a predetermined direction, and the predetermined direction corresponds to a first direction in the correction unit.
  • an exposure apparatus comprising the illumination optical system according to the fifth or sixth aspect for illuminating a predetermined pattern, and exposing the predetermined pattern onto a photosensitive substrate. To do.
  • an exposure step of exposing the predetermined pattern to the photosensitive substrate using the exposure apparatus of the seventh embodiment Developing the photosensitive substrate to which the predetermined pattern is transferred, and forming a mask layer having a shape corresponding to the predetermined pattern on the surface of the photosensitive substrate; And a processing step of processing the surface of the photosensitive substrate through the mask layer.
  • the illumination optical system includes a correction unit that is arranged in an illumination pupil space including an illumination pupil on the rear side of the optical integrator and corrects a pupil intensity distribution formed in the illumination pupil.
  • the correction unit includes a first substrate on which a first dimming pattern is formed, and a second substrate disposed on the rear side thereof and on which a second dimming pattern is formed, and the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern are provided.
  • the relative position to the pattern can be changed.
  • the correction unit has a dimming rate by the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern in accordance with a change in the relative position between the first substrate and the second substrate and a change in the incident angle of the light to the first substrate. It is configured to change.
  • the dimming action of the correction unit can independently adjust the pupil intensity distribution for each point on the irradiated surface, and consequently the pupil intensity distribution for each point is adjusted to a distribution having substantially the same properties. It is possible. Therefore, in the illumination optical system according to the first aspect of the present invention, for example, the density filter that uniformly adjusts the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the irradiated surface and the pupil intensity distribution at each point are independently adjusted. Due to the cooperative action with the correction unit, the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the irradiated surface can be adjusted substantially uniformly. In the exposure apparatus of the present invention, it is possible to perform good exposure under appropriate illumination conditions using an illumination optical system that adjusts the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the irradiated surface almost uniformly. And by extension, a good device can be manufactured.
  • the illumination optical system includes a correction unit including a pair of substrates disposed immediately before or immediately after the illumination pupil on the rear side of the optical integrator. At least one first unit attenuation region is formed on the incident surface or exit surface of the first substrate, and at least one second unit attenuation region is formed on the incident surface or exit surface of the second substrate corresponding to the first unit attenuation region. A unit dimming region is formed.
  • the first substrate and the second substrate are configured to be relatively movable along the long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface of the optical integrator.
  • the correction unit realizes various dimming rate characteristics in which the dimming rate varies according to various modes along a predetermined direction of the irradiated surface. Therefore, in the illumination optical system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a pair of pupil intensity distributions related to each point on the irradiated surface are spaced apart in a predetermined direction across the optical axis by various dimming effects of the correction unit. The light intensity difference in the region can be adjusted.
  • the exposure apparatus of the present invention using an illumination optical system that adjusts the light intensity difference between a pair of regions spaced in a predetermined direction across the optical axis in the pupil intensity distribution for each point on the irradiated surface, Good exposure can be performed under appropriate illumination conditions, and thus a good device can be manufactured.
  • FIG. 1 is a drawing schematically showing a configuration of an exposure apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the quadrupolar secondary light source formed in an illumination pupil in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the rectangular-shaped static exposure area
  • (A) shows the light intensity distribution along the Z direction of the pupil intensity distribution related to the center point P1 in the first embodiment
  • (b) shows the light intensity distribution along the Z direction of the pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 16A shows a state where a plurality of light-shielding linear regions are formed on the first substrate of the correction unit according to the modification of FIG. 16, and FIG. 9B shows a plurality of light-shielding linear regions on the second substrate.
  • substrate are set to the 2nd relative position with respect to a 1st board
  • substrate are set to the 3rd relative position with respect to a 1st board
  • FIG. 1 is a drawing schematically showing a configuration of an exposure apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the X axis is set in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.
  • exposure light (illumination light) is supplied from a light source 1 in the exposure apparatus of the first embodiment.
  • the light source for example, an ArF excimer laser light source that supplies light with a wavelength of 193 nm, a KrF excimer laser light source that supplies light with a wavelength of 248 nm, or the like can be used.
  • the light beam emitted from the light source 1 enters the afocal lens 4 via the shaping optical system 2 and the diffractive optical element 3 for annular illumination.
  • the shaping optical system 2 has a function of converting a substantially parallel light beam from the light source 1 into a substantially parallel light beam having a predetermined rectangular cross section and guiding it to the diffractive optical element 3.
  • the afocal lens 4 is set so that the front focal position thereof and the position of the diffractive optical element 3 substantially coincide with each other, and the rear focal position thereof substantially coincides with the position of the predetermined plane IP indicated by a broken line in the drawing.
  • System non-focal optical system
  • the diffractive optical element 3 is formed by forming a step having a pitch of about the wavelength of exposure light (illumination light) on the substrate, and has a function of diffracting an incident beam to a desired angle.
  • the diffractive optical element 3 for annular illumination has a function of forming an annular light intensity distribution in the far field (or Fraunhofer diffraction region) when a parallel light beam having a rectangular cross section is incident. Have.
  • the substantially parallel light beam incident on the diffractive optical element 3 forms an annular light intensity distribution on the pupil plane of the afocal lens 4 and then exits from the afocal lens 4 with an annular angular distribution.
  • a density filter 5 and a conical axicon system 6 are disposed at or near the pupil position.
  • the density filter 5 has a form of a plane parallel plate, and a dense pattern of light-shielding dots made of chromium, chromium oxide or the like is formed on the optical surface thereof. That is, the density filter 5 has a transmittance distribution with different transmittances depending on the incident position of light. The specific operation of the density filter 5 and the configuration and operation of the conical axicon system 6 will be described later.
  • the light enters the eye lens (or fly eye lens) 8.
  • the micro fly's eye lens 8 is, for example, an optical element composed of a large number of micro lenses having positive refracting power arranged vertically and horizontally and densely, and by performing etching treatment on a parallel plane plate, a micro lens group is formed. It is configured.
  • Each micro lens constituting the micro fly's eye lens is smaller than each lens element constituting the fly eye lens. Further, unlike a fly-eye lens composed of lens elements isolated from each other, a micro fly-eye lens is formed integrally with a large number of micro lenses (micro refractive surfaces) without being isolated from each other. However, the micro fly's eye lens is the same wavefront division type optical integrator as the fly eye lens in that lens elements having positive refractive power are arranged vertically and horizontally. As the micro fly's eye lens 8, for example, a cylindrical micro fly's eye lens can be used. The configuration and action of the cylindrical micro fly's eye lens are disclosed in, for example, US Pat. No. 6,913,373.
  • the position of the predetermined plane IP is disposed at or near the front focal position of the zoom lens 7, and the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 is disposed at or near the rear focal position of the zoom lens 7.
  • the zoom lens 7 arranges the predetermined plane IP and the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 substantially in a Fourier transform relationship, and consequently the pupil surface of the afocal lens 4 and the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8. Are arranged almost conjugate optically.
  • an annular illumination field centered on the optical axis AX is formed in the same manner as the pupil surface of the afocal lens 4.
  • the overall shape of the annular illumination field changes in a similar manner depending on the focal length of the zoom lens 7.
  • the entrance surface (that is, the unit wavefront dividing surface) of each microlens in the micro fly's eye lens 8 is, for example, a rectangular shape having a long side along the Y direction and a short side along the X direction. It has a rectangular shape similar to the shape of the illumination area to be formed above (and thus the shape of the exposure area to be formed on the wafer W).
  • the light beam incident on the micro fly's eye lens 8 is two-dimensionally divided, and an illumination field formed on the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 at the rear focal plane or a position in the vicinity thereof (and hence the position of the illumination pupil).
  • a secondary light source having substantially the same light intensity distribution as the light source that is, a secondary light source (pupil intensity distribution) composed of a ring-shaped substantial surface light source centered on the optical axis AX.
  • a correction unit 9 is disposed at or near the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8. The configuration and operation of the correction unit 9 will be described later.
  • An illumination aperture stop (not shown) having a ring-shaped opening (light transmitting part) corresponding to a ring-shaped secondary light source on the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or in the vicinity thereof if necessary. ) Is arranged.
  • the illumination aperture stop is configured to be detachable with respect to the illumination optical path, and is configured to be switchable with a plurality of aperture stops having apertures having different sizes and shapes.
  • an aperture stop switching method for example, a well-known turret method or slide method can be used.
  • the illumination aperture stop is disposed at a position optically conjugate with an entrance pupil plane of the projection optical system PL described later, and defines a range that contributes to illumination of the secondary light source.
  • the light that has passed through the micro fly's eye lens 8 and the correction unit 9 illuminates the mask blind 11 in a superimposed manner via the condenser optical system 10.
  • a rectangular illumination field corresponding to the shape and focal length of the microlens of the micro fly's eye lens 8 is formed on the mask blind 11 as an illumination field stop.
  • the light that has passed through the rectangular opening (light transmission portion) of the mask blind 11 passes through the imaging optical system 12 including the front lens group 12a and the rear lens group 12b, and the mask M on which a predetermined pattern is formed. Are illuminated in a superimposed manner. That is, the imaging optical system 12 forms an image of the rectangular opening of the mask blind 11 on the mask M.
  • a pattern to be transferred is formed on the mask M held on the mask stage MS, and a rectangular shape having a long side along the Y direction and a short side along the X direction in the entire pattern region ( The pattern area of the slit shape is illuminated.
  • the light transmitted through the pattern area of the mask M forms an image of the mask pattern on the wafer (photosensitive substrate) W held on the wafer stage WS via the projection optical system PL. That is, a rectangular stationary image having a long side along the Y direction and a short side along the X direction on the wafer W so as to optically correspond to the rectangular illumination area on the mask M.
  • a pattern image is formed in the exposure area (effective exposure area).
  • the mask stage MS and the wafer stage WS along the X direction (scanning direction) in the plane (XY plane) orthogonal to the optical axis AX of the projection optical system PL,
  • the wafer W has a width equal to the dimension in the Y direction of the static exposure region and corresponds to the scanning amount (movement amount) of the wafer W.
  • a mask pattern is scanned and exposed to a shot area (exposure area) having a length.
  • the conical axicon system 6 includes, in order from the light source side, a first prism member 6a having a flat surface facing the light source side and a concave conical refractive surface facing the mask side, and a convex conical shape facing the plane toward the mask side and the light source side. And a second prism member 6b facing the refractive surface.
  • the concave conical refracting surface of the first prism member 6a and the convex conical refracting surface of the second prism member 6b are complementarily formed so as to be in contact with each other.
  • At least one of the first prism member 6a and the second prism member 6b is configured to be movable along the optical axis AX, and the interval between the first prism member 6a and the second prism member 6b is configured to be variable. Has been.
  • the conical axicon system 6 functions as a plane parallel plate and has no effect on the annular secondary light source formed. .
  • the width of the annular secondary light source (1/2 of the difference between the outer diameter and the inner diameter of the annular secondary light source) becomes constant.
  • the outer diameter (inner diameter) of the annular secondary light source changes. That is, the annular ratio (inner diameter / outer diameter) and size (outer diameter) of the annular secondary light source change.
  • the zoom lens 7 has a function of enlarging or reducing the entire shape of the annular secondary light source in a similar manner. For example, by enlarging the focal length of the zoom lens 7 from a minimum value to a predetermined value, the entire shape of the annular secondary light source is similarly enlarged. In other words, due to the action of the zoom lens 7, both the width and size (outer diameter) change without changing the annular ratio of the annular secondary light source. As described above, the annular ratio and size (outer diameter) of the annular secondary light source can be controlled by the action of the conical axicon system 6 and the zoom lens 7.
  • the secondary light source formed by the micro fly's eye lens 8 is used as a light source, and the mask M arranged on the irradiated surface of the illumination optical system (2 to 12) is Koehler illuminated.
  • the position where the secondary light source is formed is optically conjugate with the position of the aperture stop AS of the projection optical system PL, and the formation surface of the secondary light source is the illumination pupil plane of the illumination optical system (2 to 12).
  • the irradiated surface (the surface on which the mask M is disposed or the surface on which the wafer W is disposed when the illumination optical system including the projection optical system PL is considered) is optical with respect to the illumination pupil plane.
  • a Fourier transform plane is used as a light source, and the mask M arranged on the irradiated surface of the illumination optical system (2 to 12) is Koehler illuminated.
  • the pupil intensity distribution is a light intensity distribution (luminance distribution) on the illumination pupil plane of the illumination optical system (2 to 12) or a plane optically conjugate with the illumination pupil plane.
  • the light intensity distribution on the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 and the surface optically conjugate with the incident surface can also be referred to as a pupil intensity distribution.
  • the diffractive optical element 3, the afocal lens 4, the zoom lens 7, and the micro fly's eye lens 8 are distribution forming optics that form a pupil intensity distribution in the illumination pupil behind the micro fly's eye lens 8.
  • the system is configured.
  • a plurality of diffractive optical elements (not shown) for multipole illumination (dipole illumination, quadrupole illumination, octupole illumination, etc.) are set in the illumination optical path. Polar lighting can be performed.
  • a diffractive optical element for multipole illumination forms a light intensity distribution of multiple poles (bipolar, quadrupole, octupole, etc.) in the far field when a parallel light beam having a rectangular cross section is incident. It has the function to do.
  • the light beam that has passed through the diffractive optical element for multipole illumination is incident on the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 from, for example, an illumination field having a plurality of predetermined shapes (arc shape, circular shape, etc.) centered on the optical axis AX.
  • an illumination field having a plurality of predetermined shapes (arc shape, circular shape, etc.) centered on the optical axis AX.
  • the same multipolar secondary light source as the illumination field formed on the incident surface is also formed on or near the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8.
  • a normal circular illumination can be performed by setting a diffractive optical element (not shown) for circular illumination in the illumination optical path.
  • the diffractive optical element for circular illumination has a function of forming a circular light intensity distribution in the far field when a parallel light beam having a rectangular cross section is incident. Therefore, the light beam that has passed through the diffractive optical element for circular illumination forms, for example, a circular illumination field around the optical axis AX on the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8.
  • a secondary light source having the same circular shape as the illumination field formed on the incident surface is also formed on or near the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8.
  • various forms of modified illumination can be performed by setting a diffractive optical element (not shown) having appropriate characteristics in the illumination optical path.
  • a switching method of the diffractive optical element 3 for example, a known turret method or slide method can be used.
  • the illumination pupil in the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or in the vicinity thereof has four arc shapes as shown in FIG. It is assumed that a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution (secondary light source) 20 composed of a substantial surface light source (hereinafter simply referred to as “surface light source”) 20a, 20b, 20c and 20d is formed. Further, it is assumed that the correction unit 9 is arranged on the rear side (mask side) from the formation surface of the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 20. Further, in the following description, the term “illumination pupil” simply refers to the illumination pupil in the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or in the vicinity thereof.
  • a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 20 formed on the illumination pupil has a pair of surface light sources 20a and 20b spaced apart in the X direction across the optical axis AX, and the optical axis AX.
  • the X direction in the illumination pupil is the short side direction of the rectangular microlens of the micro fly's eye lens 8 (the short side direction of the rectangular unit wavefront dividing surface) and corresponds to the scanning direction of the wafer W. .
  • the Y direction in the illumination pupil is the long side direction of the rectangular microlens of the micro fly's eye lens 8 (the long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface), and the scanning orthogonal direction (perpendicular to the scanning direction of the wafer W) Corresponding to the Y direction on the wafer W).
  • a rectangular still exposure region ER having a long side along the Y direction and a short side along the X direction is formed on the wafer W.
  • a rectangular illumination area (not shown) is formed on the mask M.
  • the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil by light incident on one point in the still exposure region ER has substantially the same shape without depending on the position of the incident point.
  • the light intensity of each surface light source constituting the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution tends to differ depending on the position of the incident point.
  • the pupil intensity distribution related to the center point P1 in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W (the pupil formed on the illumination pupil by the light incident on the center point P1).
  • the light intensity distribution along the Y direction (intensity distribution) of the intensity distribution has a concave curve distribution that is smallest at the center and increases toward the periphery.
  • the light intensity distribution along the Y direction of the pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W is the largest at the center and toward the periphery as shown in FIG. It has a decreasing convex curve distribution.
  • the light intensity distribution along the Y direction of the pupil intensity distribution does not depend much on the position of the incident point along the X direction (scanning direction) in the still exposure region ER, but the Y direction in the still exposure region ER. There is a tendency to change depending on the position of the incident point along the (scanning orthogonal direction).
  • the pupil intensity distribution (pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil by the light incident on each point) on each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W is not substantially uniform, for each position on the wafer W.
  • the line width of the pattern varies, and the fine pattern of the mask M cannot be faithfully transferred onto the wafer W with a desired line width over the entire exposure region.
  • the density filter 5 having a transmittance distribution with different transmittance according to the incident position of light is disposed at or near the pupil position of the afocal lens 4.
  • the pupil position of the afocal lens 4 is optically conjugate with the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 by the rear lens group 4b and the zoom lens 7. Therefore, the light intensity distribution formed on the entrance surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 is adjusted (corrected) by the action of the density filter 5 and, as a result, formed on the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or the illumination pupil near it.
  • the pupil intensity distribution to be adjusted is also adjusted.
  • the density filter 5 uniformly adjusts the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W without depending on the position of each point.
  • the action of the density filter 5 for example, adjustment is made so that the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 21 with respect to the center point P1 becomes substantially uniform, so that the light intensities of the surface light sources 21a to 21d become substantially equal to each other.
  • the difference in light intensity between the surface light sources 22a and 22b and the surface light sources 22c and 22d in the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 22 with respect to the peripheral points P2 and P3 becomes larger.
  • the pupil intensity for each point can be adjusted by means other than the density filter 5. It is necessary to adjust the distribution to distributions having the same properties. Specifically, for example, in the pupil intensity distribution 21 related to the center point P1 and the pupil intensity distribution 22 related to the peripheral points P2 and P3, the magnitude relationship between the light intensities of the surface light sources 21a and 21b and the surface light sources 21c and 21d and the surface light sources 22a and 22a. It is necessary to match the magnitude relationship of the light intensity between 22b and the surface light sources 22c and 22d at substantially the same ratio.
  • a correction unit 9 is provided as an adjusting means for adjusting the light intensity of 22b to be smaller than the light intensity of the surface light sources 22c and 22d.
  • the correction unit 9 includes a pair of light transmissive substrates 91 and 92 having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis AX (corresponding to the Z direction).
  • Each of the substrates 91 and 92 has a form of a plane parallel plate formed of an optical material such as quartz or fluorite.
  • the first substrate 91 has, for example, a circular outer shape centered on the optical axis AX, and is fixedly positioned in such a posture that its incident surface 91a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX.
  • the second substrate 92 is disposed on the rear side (mask side) of the first substrate 91 and has, for example, a circular outer shape centered on the optical axis AX. Further, the second substrate 92 is configured to be movable in the optical axis AX direction (Z direction) while maintaining the posture in which the incident surface 92a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX. In the correction unit 9, the second substrate 92 moves in the optical axis AX direction based on a command from the drive control system 99.
  • the second substrate 92 is fixedly positioned and the first substrate 91 is configured to be movable in the optical axis AX direction, or both the substrates 91 and 92 are configured to be movable in the optical axis AX direction. You can also.
  • each light-shielding dot 51a, 51b, 52a, 52b as a unit dimming region is made of, for example, chromium or chromium oxide.
  • the light shielding dots 52a are distributed so as to correspond to the light shielding dots 51a on a one-to-one basis, and the light shielding dots 52b are distributed so as to correspond to the light shielding dots 51b on a one-on-one basis.
  • the group of light shielding dots 51a and the group of light shielding dots 52a are arranged so as to act on the light from the surface light source 20a, and the group of light shielding dots 51b and the group of light shielding dots 52b are from the surface light source 20b. It arrange
  • each of the light shielding dots 51a, 51b, 52a, 52b has a circular outer shape, and the light shielding dots 51a and 52a overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction. It is assumed that the light shielding dots 51b and 52b overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction.
  • the operation of the correction unit 9 will be described by focusing on only the pair of light shielding dots 51a and 51b on the substrate 91 and the pair of light shielding dots 52a and 52b on the substrate 92. .
  • the second substrate 92 moves in the + Z direction from the reference state, and the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 in the optical axis AX direction, and thus the light shielding dots 51a and 52a. Even if the distance in the optical axis AX direction increases, the dimming regions 51aa and 52aa do not change while overlapping as shown on the right side of FIG. Similarly, when light parallel to the optical axis AX is incident, the illustration is omitted even when the second substrate 92 moves in the ⁇ Z direction from the reference state and the distance between the light shielding dots 51a and 52a becomes small. The dimming areas 51aa and 52aa do not change while overlapping.
  • the angle of the light incident on the combined dimming region composed of the combination of the circular light shielding dots 51a and 52a with respect to the optical axis AX is, for example, along the YZ plane.
  • the dimming areas 51aa and 52aa move in the Z direction by different distances immediately after the correction unit 9, and the dimming areas 51aa and The overlapping area with 52aa monotonously decreases.
  • the circular dimming regions 51aa and 52aa are larger than the area of one circular dimming region 51aa according to the area of the overlapping region. And a dimming region having an area smaller than the area of two.
  • the combined dimming region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51 a and 52 a is used to transmit light to the first substrate 91. It exhibits a dimming effect in which the dimming rate increases as the incident angle increases. This is because the left side of FIG. 11 (a) is compared with the left side of FIG. 11 (b), and the right side of FIG. 11 (a) is compared with the right side of FIG. 11 (b). Is clearer.
  • the light attenuation angle of the combined light reduction region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51b and 52b is also large in the first substrate 91. As it becomes, the dimming effect of increasing the dimming rate is exhibited.
  • the correction unit 9 when the incident angle of the light with respect to the first substrate 91 is 0 degree, that is, when the light parallel to the optical axis AX is incident, the combined reduction composed of the circular light shielding dots 51a and 52a is reduced. In the optical region, regardless of the change in the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 in the optical axis AX direction, the light attenuation rate remains unchanged and a relatively small constant light reduction effect is exhibited. This is apparent from a comparison between the left diagram in FIG. 11A and the right diagram in FIG.
  • the combined dimming region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51b and 52b is relatively small and constant regardless of the change in the distance between the substrates 91 and 92. Exhibits the dimming effect.
  • the combined dimming region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51a and 52a is As the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 in the optical axis AX direction increases, the light reduction rate increases. This is apparent from a comparison between the left side of FIG. 11B and the right side of FIG. 11B.
  • the combined dimming region composed of the circular light shielding dots 51 b and 52 b is also the optical axis AX of the substrates 91 and 92. It exhibits a dimming effect in which the dimming rate increases as the direction spacing increases.
  • the first substrate 91 and the second substrate 92 are configured to be relatively movable along the optical axis AX direction.
  • the correction unit 9 includes a pair of surface light sources 20a and 20b spaced apart in the X direction (the short side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface) across the optical axis AX in the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 20. It is configured to act on light and not to light from a pair of surface light sources 20c and 20d spaced apart in the Y direction (long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface) across the optical axis AX.
  • the light reaching the center point P1 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W that is, the light reaching the center point P1 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 is directed to the correction unit 9 ( That is, it is incident on the first substrate 91 at an incident angle of zero.
  • the light from the surface light sources 21a and 21b of the pupil intensity distribution 21 with respect to the center point P1 enters the first substrate 91 at an incident angle of 0.
  • the light reaching the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W that is, the light reaching the peripheral points P2 ′ and P3 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 9 is incident at a relatively large incident angle ⁇ ⁇ .
  • the light from the surface light sources 22a and 22b of the pupil intensity distribution 22 related to the peripheral points P2 and P3 is incident on the first substrate 91 at a relatively large incident angle ⁇ ⁇ .
  • reference numeral B1 indicates the outermost point along the X direction of the surface light source 20a (21a, 22a), and reference numeral B2 indicates the X direction of the surface light source 20b (21b, 22b). The point of the outermost edge along is shown.
  • the outermost point (see FIG. 2 and the like) along the Z direction of the surface light source 20c (21c, 22c) is indicated by reference numeral B3.
  • the point on the outermost edge along the Z direction of the surface light source 20d (21d, 22d) is indicated by reference numeral B4.
  • the light from the surface light source 20c (21c, 22c) and the surface light source 20d (21d, 22d) is not affected by the correction unit 9.
  • the pupil intensity distribution 21 related to the center point P1 the light from the surface light sources 21a and 21b is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 9, but the decrease in the light intensity is relatively small. Since the light from the surface light sources 21c and 21d does not receive the dimming action of the correction unit 9, the light intensity does not change. As a result, as shown in FIG. 14, the pupil intensity distribution 21 related to the center point P1 is adjusted to a pupil intensity distribution 21 ′ having substantially the same properties as the original distribution 21 even if the correction unit 9 receives the dimming action. Only.
  • the light intensity of the surface light sources 21 c and 21 d spaced apart in the Y direction is higher than that of the surface light sources 21 a ′ and 21 b ′ spaced in the X direction. Properties greater than light intensity are maintained.
  • the light from the surface light sources 22a and 22b is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 9, and the light intensity is relatively reduced.
  • the degree of decrease in the intensity of light from the surface light sources 22a and 22b can be adjusted by changing the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 in the correction unit 9.
  • the light from the surface light sources 22c and 22d does not receive the dimming action of the correction unit 9, and therefore the light intensity does not change.
  • the pupil intensity distribution 22 relating to the peripheral points P2 and P3 is adjusted to a pupil intensity distribution 22 'having a different property from the original distribution 22 by the dimming action of the correction unit 9, as shown in FIG. That is, in the pupil intensity distribution 22 ′ adjusted by the correction unit 9, the light intensity of the surface light sources 22c and 22d spaced in the Y direction is greater than the light of the surface light sources 22a ′ and 22b ′ spaced in the X direction. It changes to a property larger than strength.
  • the pupil intensity distribution 22 relating to the peripheral points P2 and P3 is adjusted to a distribution 22 'having substantially the same properties as the pupil intensity distribution 21' relating to the center point P1.
  • the pupil intensity distribution for each point arranged along the Y direction between the center point P1 and the peripheral points P2 and P3, and hence the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W is also the center.
  • the distribution is adjusted to a distribution having substantially the same property as the pupil intensity distribution 21 ′ relating to the point P1.
  • the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W is adjusted to a distribution having substantially the same property by the dimming action of the correction unit 9.
  • the correction unit 9 has a necessary light attenuation rate characteristic necessary for adjusting the pupil intensity distribution for each point to a distribution having substantially the same property.
  • a plurality of circular light-shielding dots 51a and 51b are formed on the emission surface 91b of the first substrate 91 as a first dimming pattern according to a predetermined distribution.
  • a plurality of circular light-shielding dots 52a and 52b are formed on the incident surface of the second substrate 92 as a second dimming pattern so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of light-shielding dots 51a and 51b.
  • the circular light-shielding dots 51a and 52a have the same size and overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction.
  • the circular light-shielding dots 51b and 52b have the same size and overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction.
  • the first substrate 91 and the second substrate 92 are configured to be relatively movable along the optical axis AX direction. Therefore, the combined light-reducing region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51a and 52a and the combined light-reduced region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51b and 52b have a large incident angle of light due to the so-called parallax effect. As the light attenuation rate increases monotonously as the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 increases, the light attenuation rate monotonously increases. However, when the incident angle of light is 0 degree, the light attenuation rate is constant without depending on the change in the distance between the substrates 91 and 92.
  • the correction unit 9 can change the first substrate 91 according to the change in the distance between the first substrate 91 and the second substrate 92 (generally, the change in the relative position) and the change in the incident angle of the light to the first substrate 91.
  • the dimming rate by the dimming pattern (51a, 51b) and the second dimming pattern (52a, 52b) is changed.
  • the correction unit 9 is disposed at a position near the illumination pupil, that is, a position where the position information of the light on the mask M (or wafer W) that is the irradiated surface is converted into the angle information of the light. Therefore, the dimming action of the correction unit 9 of the first embodiment can independently adjust the pupil intensity distribution for each point on the irradiated surface, and consequently the pupil intensity distribution for each point has substantially the same property. It is possible to adjust to the distribution of.
  • the correction unit 9 that independently adjusts the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W, and the pupil intensity for each point.
  • the illumination optical system (2 to 12) that adjusts the pupil intensity distribution at each point in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W almost uniformly is used.
  • an operation for adjusting the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER substantially uniformly, and more generally an operation for adjusting the pupil intensity distribution for each point to a required distribution is, for example, a projection.
  • This is performed based on the measurement result of a pupil intensity distribution measuring device (not shown) that measures the pupil intensity distribution on the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL based on light via the optical system PL.
  • the pupil intensity distribution measuring apparatus includes, for example, a CCD imaging unit having an imaging surface disposed at a position optically conjugate with the pupil position of the projection optical system PL, and the pupil intensity relating to each point on the image plane of the projection optical system PL.
  • the distribution (pupil intensity distribution formed on the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL by the light incident on each point) is monitored.
  • the measurement result of the pupil intensity distribution measuring device is supplied to a control unit (not shown).
  • the control unit outputs a command to the drive control system 99 of the correction unit 9 so that the pupil intensity distribution on the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL becomes a desired distribution based on the measurement result of the pupil intensity distribution measuring device.
  • the drive control system 99 controls the position of the second substrate 92 in the Z direction based on a command from the control unit, and adjusts the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W to a required distribution.
  • the light amount distribution on the wafer (irradiated surface) W is affected by, for example, the dimming action (adjusting action) of the correction unit 9.
  • the illuminance distribution in the still exposure region ER or the shape of the still exposure region (illumination region) ER can be changed as necessary by the action of the light quantity distribution adjusting unit having a known configuration.
  • the light quantity distribution adjusting unit for changing the illuminance distribution configurations described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2001-313250 and 2002-1000056 (and US Pat. Nos. 6,771,350 and 6927836 corresponding thereto). And techniques can be used.
  • the configuration and method described in the pamphlet of International Patent Publication No. WO2005 / 048326 (and the corresponding US Patent Publication No. 2007/0014112) are used. Can do.
  • the correction unit includes a pair of substrates 91 and 92 having the form of a plane-parallel plate arranged perpendicular to the optical axis AX according to the specific form shown in FIGS. 9 is constituted. Then, circular light-shielding dots 51a and 51b as first dimming patterns are distributed and formed on the emission surface 91b of the first substrate 91, and the second dimming pattern is formed on the incident surface 92a of the second substrate 92. Circular light-shielding dots 52a and 52b are distributed.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and various configurations are possible for the specific configuration of the correction unit 9.
  • the form of the substrate constituting the correction unit 9 (outer shape, etc.), the posture of the substrate, the number of unit dimming areas forming each dimming pattern, the shape of the unit dimming area, the formation surface of the unit dimming area
  • Various forms are possible with respect to the position (incident surface or exit surface), the distribution form of the unit dimming region, the arrangement position of the correction unit 9, and the like.
  • the light transmissive substrates 91 and 92 for example, a substrate having at least one surface having a curvature can be used.
  • the pair of substrates 91 and 92 are configured to be relatively movable along the optical axis AX direction.
  • a correction unit that exhibits the same operation as the correction unit 9 according to the first embodiment described above may be configured by a pair of substrates that can be relatively rotated around the optical axis AX. it can.
  • the correction unit 9A according to the modified example of the first embodiment includes a pair of light transmissive substrates 93 and 94 having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis AX.
  • Each of the substrates 93 and 94 is in the form of a plane parallel plate formed of an optical material such as quartz or fluorite.
  • the first substrate 93 has, for example, a circular outer shape centered on the optical axis AX, and can rotate around the optical axis AX while maintaining a posture in which the incident surface 93a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX. It is configured.
  • the second substrate 94 is disposed on the rear side of the first substrate 93 and has, for example, a circular outer shape centered on the optical axis AX. Further, the second substrate 94 is configured to be rotatable around the optical axis AX while maintaining a posture in which the incident surface 94a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX.
  • the first substrate 93 and the second substrate 94 rotate around the optical axis AX based on a command from the drive control system 99A.
  • the linear region 53b is formed.
  • a light-shielding linear region 54b is formed.
  • Each linear region 53a, 53b, 54a, 54b as a unit dimming region is made of, for example, chromium or chromium oxide. Further, the linear regions 54a are distributed so as to correspond one-to-one with the linear regions 53a, and the linear regions 54b are distributed so as to correspond one-to-one with the linear regions 53b.
  • the linear regions 53a, 53b, 54a, 54b have the same shape and size as each other, and are equiangular along the circumferential direction of a circle centered on the optical axis AX. It is assumed that they are arranged and extend radially from the optical axis AX at intervals. Further, at the reference rotation position of the first substrate 93, the group of linear regions 53a are in an angle range of 90 degrees between the + X axis and the + Y axis, and the group of linear regions 53b are -X axis and -Y axis. In the range of angles between.
  • the group of linear regions 54a is in an angle range between the + X axis and the ⁇ Y axis
  • the group of linear regions 54b is between the ⁇ X axis and the + Y axis. It is assumed that it is in the angle range.
  • the group of linear regions 53a, 53b, 54a, 54b are not overlapped with each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction and in the circumferential direction. Is spaced along. Therefore, the light from the surface light sources 20a to 20d is uniformly reduced by the linear regions 53a, 53b, 54a, and 54b without depending on the incident angle to the correction unit 9A (and thus the substrate 93). In other words, in the reference state of the substrates 93 and 94, the so-called parallax effect is not exhibited, and the dimming action by the linear regions 53a, 53b, 54a, 54b is constant.
  • the thick line is shown in FIG.
  • the three linear regions 53a and the three linear regions 54a overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction
  • the three linear regions 53b and the three linear regions 54b are viewed from the optical axis AX direction. To overlap each other.
  • the combined dimming region 55a composed of three linear regions 53a and 54a that overlap each other and the combined dimming region 55b composed of three linear regions 53b and 54b that overlap each other have a so-called parallax effect.
  • the combined dimming region 55a composed of the three linear regions 53a and 54a acts on the light from the surface light source 20a
  • the combined dimming region 55b composed of the three linear regions 53b and 54b is the surface light source 20b. Acts on the light from.
  • the substrate 93 is rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise in FIG. 18 from the state shown in FIG. 19 and the substrate 94 is rotated by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 18 from the state shown in FIG.
  • the five linear regions 53 a and the five linear regions 54 a overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction, and the five linear regions 53 b and the five linear regions 54 b are in the optical axis AX direction.
  • the overlapping state can be obtained. That is, the overlapping regions 55a and 55b where the linear regions 53a, 53b, 54a, and 54b overlap when viewed from the optical axis AX direction are larger than the state shown in FIG.
  • the combined dimming region 55a composed of the five linear regions 53a and 54a and the combined dimming region 55b composed of the five linear regions 53b and 54b increase as the incident angle of light increases. Demonstrates a dimming effect in which the dimming rate increases monotonously.
  • the first dimming pattern (53a, 53b) and the second dimming pattern are changed according to the change in the relative rotational position of the first substrate 93 and the second substrate 94 around the optical axis AX.
  • the size of the overlapping regions 55a and 55b where the light patterns (54a and 54b) overlap with each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction is changed.
  • the overlapping regions 55a and 55b between the first dimming pattern (53a and 53b) and the second dimming pattern (54a and 54b) are large. As it becomes, the dimming effect of increasing the dimming rate is exhibited.
  • the first dimming pattern in accordance with the change in the relative position of the first substrate 93 and the second substrate 94 around the optical axis AX and the change in the incident angle of the light to the first substrate 93).
  • 53a, 53b) and the second light attenuation pattern change the light attenuation rate.
  • the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W is independently determined by the dimming action of the correction unit 9A according to the modification of FIG. It is possible to adjust the pupil intensity distribution for each point to distributions having substantially the same properties.
  • both the substrates 93 and 94 are rotated around the optical axis AX.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the substrates 93 and 94 is rotated around the optical axis AX.
  • the correction unit can also be configured by rotating.
  • the correction unit 9A is composed of a pair of substrates 93 and 94 having the form of a plane parallel plate arranged perpendicular to the optical axis AX. Is configured.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and various forms are possible for the specific configuration of the correction unit 9A.
  • the form of the substrate constituting the correction unit 9A (outer shape, etc.), the posture of the substrate, the number of unit dimming areas forming each dimming pattern, the shape of the unit dimming area, the formation surface of the unit dimming area
  • the position incident surface or exit surface
  • the distribution form of the unit attenuation region the arrangement position of the correction unit 9A, and the like.
  • the light transmissive substrates 93 and 94 for example, a substrate having at least one surface having a curvature can be used.
  • the pair of substrates 93 and 94 are configured to be relatively rotatable around the optical axis AX.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and a pair of substrates that are relatively movable in a direction crossing the optical axis AX (typically, any direction along the XY plane orthogonal to the optical axis AX) can be used.
  • a correction unit having the same operation as that of the correction unit 9A according to the modified example can be configured. In this case, the overlapping region where the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern overlap as seen from the optical axis direction according to the change in the relative position along the direction crossing the optical axis between the first substrate and the second substrate. It is important that the size of the is changed.
  • the correction unit 9 (9A) is arranged.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the correction unit 9 (9A) can also be arranged at the position of the formation surface of the pupil intensity distribution 20 or the front side (light source side) thereof.
  • the position of the illumination pupil on the rear side of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or the vicinity thereof for example, the position of the illumination pupil between the front lens group 12a and the rear lens group 12b of the imaging optical system 12 or the vicinity thereof.
  • the correction unit 9 (9A) can be arranged.
  • the correction unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil is adjacent to the optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and the rear side of the illumination pupil.
  • a light-transmissive first substrate disposed in an illumination pupil space between the optical elements having power and having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis; and disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space.
  • a light transmissive second substrate having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis.
  • a first dimming pattern is formed on the first substrate, a second dimming pattern is formed on the second substrate corresponding to the first dimming pattern, and the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern are The relative position can be changed.
  • At least one of the first substrate and the second substrate is configured to be movable in a predetermined direction or rotatable about a predetermined axis.
  • the “illumination pupil space” there may be a parallel plane plate or a plane mirror having no power.
  • the unit attenuation region that forms the dimming pattern of the substrate is formed as a light-blocking region that blocks incident light by a light-blocking dot made of, for example, chromium or chromium oxide. ing.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the unit dimming area may have a form other than the form of the light shielding area.
  • at least one of the plurality of dimming patterns can be formed as a scattering region for scattering incident light or as a diffraction region for diffracting incident light.
  • a scattering region is formed by roughening a required region of a light-transmitting substrate, and a diffraction region is formed by applying a diffractive surface forming process to the required region.
  • FIG. 21 is a drawing schematically showing a configuration of an exposure apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • the Z-axis is along the normal direction of the exposure surface (transfer surface) of wafer W, which is a photosensitive substrate, and the Y-axis is in the direction parallel to the paper surface of FIG.
  • the X axis is set in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.
  • the second embodiment has a configuration similar to that of the first embodiment, but particularly the configuration of the correction unit 19 is different from that of the first embodiment.
  • the density filter 5 and the conical axicon system 6 are arranged at or near the pupil position of the afocal lens 4, but in the second embodiment, the density filter is not necessary and is installed.
  • the conical axicon system can be installed if necessary, but its installation is omitted.
  • FIG. 21 the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 1 are assigned to components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment of FIG. In the following, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment, explanations of the configuration and operation of the second embodiment will be described while omitting the overlapping description with the first embodiment.
  • light emitted from the light source 1 enters the afocal lens 4 via the shaping optical system 2 and the diffractive optical element 3 for annular illumination.
  • the light passing through the afocal lens 4 enters the micro fly's eye lens 8 through the predetermined surface IP and the zoom lens 7.
  • the light beam incident on the micro fly's eye lens 8 is two-dimensionally divided, and the illumination pupil at or near the rear focal plane thereof is, for example, a secondary comprising a substantial surface light source having an annular shape centering on the optical axis AX.
  • a light source (pupil intensity distribution) is formed.
  • a correction unit 19 is disposed at or near the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8. The configuration and operation of the correction unit 19 will be described later.
  • the light that has passed through the micro fly's eye lens 8 and the correction unit 19 illuminates the mask M in a superimposed manner via the condenser optical system 10, the mask blind 11, and the imaging optical system 12.
  • the light that has passed through the pattern area of the mask M forms an image of the mask pattern on the wafer W via the projection optical system PL.
  • the mask pattern in the shot area (exposure area) of the wafer W is obtained by synchronously moving (scanning) the mask M and the wafer W along the X direction (scanning direction) in accordance with the step-and-scan method. Are subjected to scanning exposure.
  • a quadrupolar shape as shown in FIG. 22 is provided on the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or in the vicinity of the illumination pupil. It is assumed that a pupil intensity distribution (secondary light source) 30 is formed. It is assumed that the correction unit 19 is disposed immediately after the formation surface of the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 30.
  • the term “illumination pupil” simply refers to the illumination pupil at or near the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8.
  • a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 30 formed on the illumination pupil includes a pair of arcuate substantial surface light sources 30a and 30b spaced apart in the X direction across the optical axis AX, And a pair of arc-shaped substantial surface light sources (hereinafter simply referred to as “surface light sources”) 30 c and 30 d spaced apart in the Z direction across the optical axis AX.
  • the X direction in the illumination pupil is the short-side direction of the rectangular microlens of the micro fly's eye lens 8 (that is, the short-side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface) and corresponds to the scanning direction of the wafer W.
  • the Z direction in the illumination pupil is the long side direction of the rectangular microlens of the micro fly's eye lens 8 (that is, the long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface), and the scanning orthogonal direction orthogonal to the scanning direction of the wafer W (Y direction on the wafer W).
  • a rectangular still exposure region ER having a long side along the Y direction and a short side along the X direction.
  • a rectangular illumination area (not shown) is formed on the mask M so as to correspond to the static exposure area ER.
  • the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil by light incident on one point in the still exposure region ER has substantially the same shape without depending on the position of the incident point.
  • the light intensity of each surface light source constituting the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution may differ depending on the position of the incident point.
  • light incident on peripheral points P2 and P3 in the still exposure region ER forms a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution schematically shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, respectively, on the illumination pupil.
  • the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 32 formed by the light incident on the peripheral point P2 spaced from the central point P1 in the still exposure region ER in the + Y direction as shown in FIG. 23, as shown in FIG. 32b and 32d are substantially equal to each other, and the light intensity of the surface light source 32c is greater than the light intensity of the other surface light sources.
  • the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 33 formed by the light incident on the peripheral point P3 spaced in the ⁇ Y direction from the center point P1 in the still exposure region ER as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the light intensities of 33a, 33b and 33c are substantially equal to each other, and the light intensity of the surface light source 33d is larger than the light intensities of other surface light sources.
  • the pupil intensity distribution regarding each point on the wafer W the light of a pair of regions spaced apart in the Z direction (direction corresponding to the scanning orthogonal direction (Y direction on the wafer W)) across the optical axis AX. If the difference in intensity is too large, the pattern printed on the shot area (the peripheral positions corresponding to the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the example shown in FIGS. 23 and 24) may be displaced from the desired position. .
  • a correction unit 19 is provided as an adjustment means for adjusting the difference in light intensity between the two.
  • the correction unit 19 includes three light transmissive substrates 191, 192, and 193 having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis AX (corresponding to the Y direction).
  • Each of the substrates 191 to 193 has the form of a plane parallel plate formed of an optical material such as quartz or fluorite.
  • the first substrate 191 has, for example, a circular outer shape centered on the optical axis AX, and is fixedly positioned in such a posture that its incident surface 191a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX.
  • the second substrate 192 is disposed on the rear side of the first substrate 191 and has an outer shape corresponding to a region through which light from the surface light source 30c passes, for example, a fan-shaped outer shape.
  • the second substrate 192 is configured to be movable in the Z direction (long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing plane) while maintaining the posture in which the incident surface 192a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX.
  • the third substrate 193 is disposed on the rear side of the first substrate 191 and has an outer shape corresponding to a region through which light from the surface light source 30d passes, for example, a fan-shaped outer shape. Further, the third substrate 193 is configured to be movable in the Z direction while maintaining the posture in which the incident surface 193a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX.
  • the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 have a symmetric configuration with respect to the XY plane passing through the optical axis AX, and the incident surface 192a of the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 The incident surface 193a is on the same plane.
  • the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 move in the Z direction based on a command from the drive control system 194.
  • each of the light-shielding dots 151 to 153 as the unit dimming region is made of, for example, chromium or chromium oxide. Further, the light shielding dots 151 are distributed so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the light shielding dots 152 and 153.
  • the group of light shielding dots 151 are arranged so as to act on the light from the surface light sources 30c and 30d
  • the group of light shielding dots 152 are arranged so as to act on the light from the surface light source 30c.
  • the characteristic dots 153 are arranged so as to act on the light from the surface light source 30d.
  • each of the light shielding dots 151 to 153 has a circular outer shape, and the light shielding dots 151 and 152 are light-transmitted in the reference state (reference position) of the second substrate 192.
  • the correction unit is focused on only the pair of light shielding dots 151 on the substrate 191, one light shielding dot 152 on the substrate 192, and one light shielding dot 153 on the substrate 193. The operation of 19 will be described.
  • the region 151a dimmed by the circular light-shielding dot 151 and the region 152a dimmed by the circular light-shielding dot 152 are Overlap each other. That is, immediately after the correction unit 19, the circular dimming areas 151a and 152a form a dimming area having an area corresponding to one of the circular dimming areas 151a.
  • the dimming areas 151a and 152a move in the Z direction by different distances, and the area where the dimming areas 151a and 152a overlap is monotonously reduced.
  • the circular dimming regions 151a and 152a are larger than the area of one circular dimming region 151a according to the area of the overlapping region.
  • a dimming region having an area smaller than the area of two is formed.
  • the combined light reduction region composed of the circular light shielding dots 151 and 152 has a light attenuation rate that increases as the incident angle of light with respect to the first substrate 191 increases. Demonstrate the effect.
  • the combined light reduction region composed of the circular light shielding dots 151 and 153 is a decrease in which the light reduction rate increases as the incident angle of light with respect to the first substrate 191 increases. Exhibits light action.
  • the second Consider the case where the substrate 192 moves in the Z direction from the reference state.
  • the second substrate 192 is in the reference state, immediately after the correction unit 19, the light is attenuated by the region 151 a dimmed by the circular light shielding dot 151 and the circular light shielding dot 152.
  • the regions 152a overlap each other. That is, as shown in FIG. 28A, immediately after the correction unit 19, the circular dimming areas 151a and 152a are dimming areas having an area corresponding to one of the circular dimming areas 151a.
  • the dimming area 152a moves in the Z direction and the area overlapping the dimming area 151a monotonously decreases. That is, as shown in FIG. 28B, immediately after the correction unit 19, the circular dimming regions 151a and 152a correspond to one of the circular dimming regions 151a according to the area of the overlapping region. A dimming region having an area larger than the area of the minute and smaller than the area of the two is formed.
  • the combined dimming region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 151 and 152 is As the amount of movement along the Z direction from the reference state of the second substrate 192 increases, the light reduction rate increases.
  • the combined dimming region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 151 and 153 extends along the Z direction from the reference state of the third substrate 193. It exhibits a dimming effect in which the dimming rate increases as the amount of movement increases.
  • the first substrate 191 and the second substrate 192 are centered on a reference state in which circular light-shielding dots 151 and 152 that are unit dimming regions overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction.
  • a part of the light-shielding dot 151 and a part of the light-shielding dot 152 are configured to be relatively movable within a range where they overlap when viewed from the optical axis AX direction.
  • the first substrate 191 and the third substrate 193 have a light-shielding dot centered on a reference state in which circular light-shielding dots 151 and 153 that are unit dimming regions overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction.
  • a part of 151 and a part of light-shielding dot 153 are configured to be relatively movable within a range where they overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction.
  • the correction unit 19 acts on the light from the pair of surface light sources 30c and 30d spaced apart in the Z direction across the optical axis AX in the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 30. To do. However, the correction unit 19 does not act on the light from the pair of surface light sources 30a and 30b spaced in the X direction across the optical axis AX.
  • the light reaching the center point P1 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W that is, the light reaching the center point P1 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 is transmitted to the correction unit 19 ( That is, it is incident on the first substrate 191) at an incident angle of zero.
  • the light from the surface light source 31c of the pupil intensity distribution 31 with respect to the center point P1 is incident on the first substrate 191 and the second substrate 192 at the incident angle 0, and the light from the surface light source 31d is the first at the incident angle 0.
  • the light enters the substrate 191 and the third substrate 193.
  • the surface light sources 31a to 31d are formed in the same manner as the surface light sources 32a to 32d (33a to 33d) of the pupil intensity distribution 32 (33).
  • the light reaching the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W that is, the light reaching the peripheral points P2 ′ and P3 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 19 is incident at a relatively large incident angle ⁇ ⁇ .
  • light from the surface light sources 32c and 33c of the pupil intensity distributions 32 and 33 relating to the peripheral points P2 and P3 is incident on the first substrate 191 and the second substrate 192 at a relatively large incident angle ⁇ ⁇ .
  • Light from the surface light sources 32d and 33d is incident on the first substrate 191 and the third substrate 193, respectively, at a relatively large incident angle ⁇ ⁇ .
  • reference numeral B3 indicates the outermost point along the X direction of the surface light source 30a (31a to 33a), and reference numeral B2 indicates the surface light source.
  • the outermost edge point along the X direction of 30b (31b to 33b) is shown.
  • the light from the surface light sources 30a (31a to 33a) and the surface light sources 30b (31b to 33b) is not affected by the correction unit 19.
  • FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the relative positions of the second substrate and the third substrate with respect to the first substrate and the dimming action of the correction unit.
  • the second substrate 192 is in the reference state, and the light shielding dots 151 on the first substrate 191 and the light shielding dots 152 on the second substrate 192 overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction.
  • the third substrate 193 is moved by a predetermined distance in the + Z direction from the reference state, and part of the light shielding dots 151 on the first substrate 191 and part of the light shielding dots 152 on the second substrate 192 are light. They overlap when viewed from the direction of the axis AX.
  • the light reaching the center point P 1 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W that is, the light reaching the center point P 1 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 is incident on the first substrate 191 at an incident angle of 0. Therefore, in the case of light reaching the center point P1 'from the surface light source 30c through the first substrate 191 and the second substrate 192, the amount of light blocked by the combined dimming region of the light blocking dots 151 and 152 is the smallest. In the case of light reaching the center point P1 'from the surface light source 30d through the first substrate 191 and the third substrate 193, the amount of light blocked by the combined light reduction region of the light blocking dots 151 and 153 is relatively large.
  • the light reaching the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W that is, the light reaching the peripheral points P2 ′ and P3 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 is relatively incident on the first substrate 191. Incident at an angle ⁇ .
  • the peripheral point P2 ′ corresponding to the peripheral point P2 in the still exposure region ER is located on the + Z direction side of the opening of the mask blind 11, and the peripheral point P3 in the still exposure region ER. It is assumed that the peripheral point P3 ′ corresponding to is located on the ⁇ Z direction side.
  • the amount of light blocked by the combined light reduction region of the light blocking dots 151 and 152 is compared. Big. In the case of light reaching the peripheral point P2 'from the surface light source 30d through the first substrate 191 and the third substrate 193, the amount of light blocked by the combined light reduction region of the light blocking dots 151 and 153 is relatively small. In the case of light reaching the peripheral point P3 'from the surface light source 30d through the first substrate 191 and the third substrate 193, the amount of light blocked by the combined dimming region of the light blocking dots 151 and 153 is the largest.
  • the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 31c on the + Z direction side is the smallest, and the surface on the ⁇ Z direction side
  • the dimming effect of the correction unit 19 on the light source 31d is relatively large.
  • the magnitude of the dimming action of the correction unit 19 is schematically represented by the width dimension in the Z direction of the hatched area extending in the X direction. Yes.
  • the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32c is relatively large, and the reduction by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32d.
  • the light effect is relatively small.
  • the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33c is relatively large, and the reduction by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33d. The light effect is the largest.
  • the center point P1 is related.
  • the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 31c and the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 31d are both relatively large.
  • the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral point P2 the light reduction effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32c is the largest, and the light reduction effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32d is relatively small.
  • the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33c is relatively small, and the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33d is the largest.
  • the center point P1 is related.
  • the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 31c and the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 31d are both relatively large.
  • the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32c is relatively small, and the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32d is the largest.
  • the light reduction effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33c is the largest, and the light reduction effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33d is relatively small.
  • the second substrate 192 is set at a required position along the Z direction
  • the third substrate 193 is set at a required position along the Z direction so that the optical axis AX is sandwiched in the Z direction.
  • the difference in light intensity as shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 existing between the pair of surface light sources 32c and 32d and between the pair of surface light sources 33c and 33d can be adjusted.
  • the second substrate 192 of the correction unit 19 is at a position moved from the reference state by a required distance along the ⁇ Z direction, and the third substrate 193 is moved from the reference state by a required distance along the + Z direction.
  • the light from the surface light sources 32a and 32b is not affected by the dimming action of the correction unit 19, so that the light intensity does not change as shown in FIG. .
  • the light from the surface light source 32c is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 19, and its light intensity is relatively greatly reduced. Even if the light from the surface light source 32d is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 19, the decrease in the light intensity is relatively small.
  • the light intensity of the surface light source 32 c ′ spaced apart in the Z direction is approximately equal to the light intensity of the surface light source 32 d ′.
  • the difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 32c 'and the light intensity of the surface light source 32d' is adjusted to a required light intensity difference.
  • the light from the surface light sources 33a and 33b is not affected by the dimming action of the correction unit 19, and therefore the light intensity does not change. Even if the light from the surface light source 33c is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 19, the decrease in the light intensity is relatively small. The light from the surface light source 33d is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 19, and its light intensity is relatively reduced.
  • the light intensity of the surface light source 33 c ′ spaced apart in the Z direction is approximately equal to the light intensity of the surface light source 33 d ′.
  • the difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 33c 'and the light intensity of the surface light source 33d' is adjusted to a required light intensity difference.
  • the operation of adjusting the difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 32c ′ and the light intensity of the surface light source 32d ′ and the difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 33c ′ and the light intensity of the surface light source 33d ′ to a required light intensity difference is as follows.
  • the measurement is performed based on the measurement result of a pupil intensity distribution measuring device (not shown) that measures the pupil intensity distribution on the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL based on light via the projection optical system PL.
  • the measurement result of the pupil intensity distribution measuring device is supplied to a control unit (not shown).
  • the control unit outputs a command to the drive control system 194 of the correction unit 19 so that the pupil intensity distribution on the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL becomes a desired distribution based on the measurement result of the pupil intensity distribution measuring device.
  • the drive control system 194 controls the position of the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 in the Z direction based on a command from the control unit, and the difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 32c ′ and the light intensity of the surface light source 32d ′ and The difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 33c ′ and the light intensity of the surface light source 33d ′ is adjusted to a required light intensity difference.
  • the second substrate 192 having the light-shielding dots 152 and 153 formed on the incident surface is different from the first substrate 191 having the light-shielding dots 151 formed on the exit surface.
  • the third substrate 193 is configured to be relatively movable along the Z direction, which is the long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface. Accordingly, as is apparent with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34, the correction unit 19 has a dimming rate according to various modes along the Y direction (corresponding to the Z direction in the illumination pupil) in the still exposure region ER. Realizes various dimming rate characteristics that change.
  • the correction unit 19 exhibits the same operation as described above even when the distributions 151 to 153 are distributed.
  • the dimming action of the correction unit 19 causes the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER to be in the Y direction across the optical axis AX. It is possible to adjust the difference in light intensity between a pair of spaced regions (in the example of FIGS. 23 and 24, between the pair of surface light sources 32c and 32d and between the pair of surface light sources 33c and 33d). it can.
  • the illumination optical system (2 to 12) that adjusts the difference in light intensity, it is possible to perform good exposure under appropriate illumination conditions according to the fine pattern of the mask M. As a result, the fine pattern of the mask M can be formed. The entire exposure area can be faithfully transferred onto the wafer W at a desired position and with a desired line width.
  • the light amount distribution on the wafer (irradiated surface) W is affected by, for example, the dimming action (adjusting action) of the correction unit 19.
  • the illuminance distribution in the still exposure region ER or the shape of the still exposure region (illumination region) ER can be changed as necessary by the action of the light quantity distribution adjusting unit having a known configuration.
  • the correction unit is constituted by three substrates 191 to 193 having the form of parallel plane plates arranged perpendicular to the optical axis AX according to the specific form shown in FIGS. 19 is constituted. Then, circular light-shielding dots 151 serving as a first dimming pattern are distributed and formed on the emission surface of the first substrate 191. On the incident surface of the second substrate 192 and the incident surface of the third substrate 193, a circular light-shielding dot 152 as a second dimming pattern and a circular light-shielding dot 153 as a third dimming pattern are provided. Distribution is formed.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and various configurations are possible for the specific configuration of the correction unit 19.
  • the number of substrates constituting the correction unit 19 the form of the substrate (outer shape, etc.), the posture of the substrate, the direction of relative movement between the substrates, the number of unit dimming areas forming each dimming pattern, and unit dimming
  • the shape of the region the position of the formation surface of the unit dimming region (incident surface or exit surface), the distribution form of the unit dimming region, the arrangement position of the correction unit 19, and the like.
  • the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 are integrated, the first substrate 191 is configured to be movable along the Z direction, or one of the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 Even if the installation of is omitted, the same effect as in the second embodiment described above can be exhibited.
  • the light transmissive substrate for example, a substrate in which at least one surface has a curvature can be used.
  • the correction unit 19 is located behind (on the mask side) the formation surface of the pupil intensity distribution 30 formed on the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or the illumination pupil in the vicinity thereof. Is arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correction unit 19 can also be arranged at the position of the formation surface of the pupil intensity distribution 30 or the front side (light source side) thereof. Further, the position of the illumination pupil on the rear side of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or the vicinity thereof, for example, the position of the illumination pupil between the front lens group 12a and the rear lens group 12b of the imaging optical system 12 or the vicinity thereof. In addition, the correction unit 19 can be arranged.
  • a correction unit for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil is adjacent to the optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and the rear side of the illumination pupil.
  • a light-transmissive first substrate disposed in an illumination pupil space between the optical elements having power and having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis; and disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space.
  • a light transmissive second substrate having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis.
  • a first dimming pattern having at least one first unit dimming region is formed on the first substrate, and at least one second unit dimming formed corresponding to the first unit dimming region is formed on the second substrate.
  • a second dimming pattern having a light region is formed.
  • the first substrate and the second substrate are configured to be relatively movable along a first direction that crosses the optical axis.
  • the unit dimming area for forming the dimming pattern of the substrate is formed as a light blocking area that blocks incident light by a light blocking dot made of, for example, chromium or chromium oxide.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the unit dimming area may have a form other than the form of the light shielding area.
  • at least one of the plurality of dimming patterns can be formed as a scattering region for scattering incident light or as a diffraction region for diffracting incident light.
  • a scattering region is formed by roughening a required region of a light-transmitting substrate, and a diffraction region is formed by applying a diffractive surface forming process to the required region.
  • the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 are configured to be movable relative to the first substrate 191, respectively.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and all the substrates 191 to 193 may be fixedly installed.
  • a part of the first unit dimming region (corresponding to the light shielding dot 151) of the first substrate 191 and a part of the second unit light reducing region (corresponding to the light shielding dot 152) of the second substrate 192 are formed.
  • a portion of the first unit attenuation region of the first substrate 191 and a part of the third unit attenuation region (corresponding to the light shielding dot 153) of the third substrate 193 overlap with each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction. It is important that the substrates 191 to 193 are fixedly positioned so as to overlap when viewed from the axis AX direction.
  • the first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region are displaced in the Z direction, and the first unit dimming region and the third unit dimming are included.
  • Each substrate 191 to 193 is fixedly positioned in a state where the region is displaced in the Z direction. Even in the configuration in which each substrate is fixedly positioned, the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 can be integrated, or the installation of one of the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 can be omitted. .
  • the correction unit according to the second embodiment of the present invention according to the configuration in which the respective substrates are fixedly positioned has the first dimming formed on the first surface perpendicular to the optical axis in the illumination pupil space. And a second dimming pattern that is positioned on the rear side of the first surface in the illumination pupil space and formed on a second surface parallel to the first surface.
  • the first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming area
  • the second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming area formed corresponding to the first unit dimming area. A part of the first unit dimming region and a part of the second unit dimming region overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis direction.
  • the correction unit according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention is arranged in the illumination pupil space and has a light transmission property having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis.
  • a light-transmissive second substrate that is disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space and has a predetermined thickness along the optical axis, and the first substrate is located on the light incident side.
  • a second substrate having at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface.
  • the first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming area
  • the second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming formed corresponding to the at least one first unit dimming area. Has a region.
  • the first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region provide a first dimming rate for light incident on the first unit dimming region at a first incident angle, and the first unit dimming region A second dimming rate different from the first dimming rate is given to light incident at a second incident angle different from the first incident angle to the dimming region, and the first substrate and the second substrate The positional relationship of can be changed.
  • the operational effects of the present invention are described by taking, as an example, modified illumination in which a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution is formed on the illumination pupil, that is, quadrupole illumination.
  • the present invention is not limited to quadrupole illumination.
  • annular illumination in which an annular pupil intensity distribution is formed multipolar illumination in which a multipolar pupil intensity distribution other than quadrupole is formed, and the like.
  • variable pattern forming apparatus that forms a predetermined pattern based on predetermined electronic data can be used instead of a mask.
  • a variable pattern forming apparatus for example, a DMD (digital micromirror device) including a plurality of reflecting elements driven based on predetermined electronic data can be used.
  • An exposure apparatus using DMD is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-304135, pamphlet of International Patent Publication No. 2006/080285 and US Patent Publication No. 2007/0296936 corresponding thereto.
  • a transmissive spatial light modulator may be used, or a self-luminous image display element may be used.
  • a variable pattern forming apparatus may be used even when the pattern surface is placed horizontally.
  • the micro fly's eye lens 8 is used as the optical integrator, but instead, an internal reflection type optical integrator (typically a rod type integrator) may be used.
  • the condensing lens is arranged on the rear side of the zoom lens 7 so that the front focal position thereof coincides with the rear focal position of the zoom lens 7, and the incident end is located at or near the rear focal position of the condensing lens.
  • Position the rod-type integrator so that is positioned. At this time, the exit end of the rod integrator is the position of the illumination field stop 11.
  • a position optically conjugate with the position of the aperture stop AS of the projection optical system PL in the field stop imaging optical system 12 downstream of the rod type integrator can be called an illumination pupil plane.
  • this position and a position optically conjugate with this position are also called the illumination pupil plane.
  • the zoom lens 7, the above-described condenser lens, and the rod integrator can be regarded as a distribution forming optical system.
  • the diffractive optical element 3 instead of or in addition to the diffractive optical element 3, for example, it is constituted by a large number of minute element mirrors arranged in an array and whose tilt angle and tilt direction are individually driven and controlled.
  • a spatial light modulation element that converts the cross section of the light beam into a desired shape or a desired size by dividing the light beam into small units for each reflecting surface and deflecting the light beam may be used.
  • An illumination optical system using such a spatial light modulator is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-353105.
  • the exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment is manufactured by assembling various subsystems including the respective constituent elements recited in the claims of the present application so as to maintain predetermined mechanical accuracy, electrical accuracy, and optical accuracy. Is done.
  • various optical systems are adjusted to achieve optical accuracy
  • various mechanical systems are adjusted to achieve mechanical accuracy
  • various electrical systems are Adjustments are made to achieve electrical accuracy.
  • the assembly process from the various subsystems to the exposure apparatus includes mechanical connection, electrical circuit wiring connection, pneumatic circuit piping connection and the like between the various subsystems. Needless to say, there is an assembly process for each subsystem before the assembly process from the various subsystems to the exposure apparatus. When the assembly process of the various subsystems to the exposure apparatus is completed, comprehensive adjustment is performed to ensure various accuracies as the entire exposure apparatus.
  • the exposure apparatus is preferably manufactured in a clean room where the temperature, cleanliness, etc. are controlled.
  • FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing manufacturing steps of a semiconductor device.
  • a metal film is vapor-deposited on a wafer W to be a semiconductor device substrate (step S40), and a photoresist, which is a photosensitive material, is applied on the vapor-deposited metal film.
  • Step S42 the pattern formed on the mask (reticle) M is transferred to each shot area on the wafer W (step S44: exposure process), and the transfer of the wafer W after the transfer is completed.
  • step S46 development process
  • step S48 processing step
  • the resist pattern is a photoresist layer in which unevenness having a shape corresponding to the pattern transferred by the exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment is generated, and the recess penetrates the photoresist layer. is there.
  • the surface of the wafer W is processed through this resist pattern.
  • the processing performed in step S48 includes, for example, at least one of etching of the surface of the wafer W or film formation of a metal film or the like.
  • the exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment performs pattern transfer using the wafer W coated with the photoresist as the photosensitive substrate, that is, the plate P.
  • FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a manufacturing process of a liquid crystal device such as a liquid crystal display element.
  • a pattern forming process step S50
  • a color filter forming process step S52
  • a cell assembling process step S54
  • a module assembling process step S56
  • a predetermined pattern such as a circuit pattern and an electrode pattern is formed on the glass substrate coated with a photoresist as the plate P using the exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment.
  • an exposure process for transferring the pattern to the photoresist layer using the exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment and development of the plate P to which the pattern is transferred, that is, development of the photoresist layer on the glass substrate are performed.
  • a developing step for generating a photoresist layer having a shape corresponding to the pattern and a processing step for processing the surface of the glass substrate through the developed photoresist layer.
  • step S52 a large number of sets of three dots corresponding to R (Red), G (Green), and B (Blue) are arranged in a matrix or three R, G, and B A color filter is formed by arranging a plurality of stripe filter sets in the horizontal scanning direction.
  • a liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal cell) is assembled using the glass substrate on which the predetermined pattern is formed in step S50 and the color filter formed in step S52. Specifically, for example, a liquid crystal panel is formed by injecting liquid crystal between a glass substrate and a color filter.
  • various components such as an electric circuit and a backlight for performing the display operation of the liquid crystal panel are attached to the liquid crystal panel assembled in step S54.
  • the present invention is not limited to application to an exposure apparatus for manufacturing a semiconductor device, for example, an exposure apparatus for a display device such as a liquid crystal display element formed on a square glass plate or a plasma display, It can also be widely applied to an exposure apparatus for manufacturing various devices such as an image sensor (CCD or the like), a micromachine, a thin film magnetic head, and a DNA chip. Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to an exposure process (exposure apparatus) when manufacturing a mask (photomask, reticle, etc.) on which mask patterns of various devices are formed using a photolithography process.
  • an exposure apparatus for manufacturing a semiconductor device for example, an exposure apparatus for a display device such as a liquid crystal display element formed on a square glass plate or a plasma display
  • various devices such as an image sensor (CCD or the like), a micromachine, a thin film magnetic head, and a DNA chip.
  • the present invention can also be applied to an exposure process (exposure apparatus) when manufacturing a mask (photomask,
  • ArF excimer laser light (wavelength: 193 nm) or KrF excimer laser light (wavelength: 248 nm) is used as the exposure light.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and other suitable laser light sources.
  • the present invention can also be applied to an F 2 laser light source that supplies laser light having a wavelength of 157 nm.
  • a so-called immersion method is applied in which the optical path between the projection optical system and the photosensitive substrate is filled with a medium (typically liquid) having a refractive index larger than 1.1. You may do it.
  • a method for filling the liquid in the optical path between the projection optical system and the photosensitive substrate a method for locally filling the liquid as disclosed in International Publication No. WO 99/49504, A method of moving a stage holding a substrate to be exposed as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 6-124873 in a liquid bath, or a stage having a predetermined depth on a stage as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-303114.
  • a technique of forming a liquid tank and holding the substrate in the liquid tank can be employed.
  • the teachings of WO99 / 49504, JP-A-6-124873 and JP-A-10-303114 are incorporated by reference.
  • the present invention is applied to a step-and-scan type exposure apparatus that scans and exposes the pattern of the mask M on the shot area of the wafer W.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can also be applied to a step-and-repeat type exposure apparatus that repeats the operation of collectively exposing the pattern of the mask M to each exposure region of the wafer W.
  • the present invention is applied to the illumination optical system that illuminates the mask (or wafer) in the exposure apparatus.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and an object other than the mask (or wafer) is used.
  • the present invention can also be applied to a general illumination optical system that illuminates the irradiation surface.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Exposure And Positioning Against Photoresist Photosensitive Materials (AREA)
  • Microscoopes, Condenser (AREA)

Abstract

An illumination optical system capable of almost homogeneously adjusting each pupil intensity distribution at each point on a surface to be irradiated.  A correction unit (9) for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil of the illumination optical system is provided with a first substrate (91) and a second substrate (92) which is arranged behind the first substrate (91), wherein a first extinction pattern is formed on an ejection surface (91b) of the first substrate, and wherein a second extinction pattern is formed on an incidence surface (92a) of the second substrate correspondingly to the first extinction pattern.  The correction unit (9) is configured in such a manner that the relative position between the first extinction pattern and the second extinction pattern is changeable, and that the extinction rates of the first and second extinction patterns change according to changes in the relative position therebetween and changes in the incidence angle of the light to the first substrate.

Description

補正ユニット、照明光学系、露光装置、およびデバイス製造方法Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method

 本発明は、補正ユニット、照明光学系、露光装置、およびデバイス製造方法に関する。さらに詳細には、本発明は、例えば半導体素子、撮像素子、液晶表示素子、薄膜磁気ヘッド等のデバイスをリソグラフィー工程で製造するための露光装置に好適な照明光学系に関するものである。 The present invention relates to a correction unit, an illumination optical system, an exposure apparatus, and a device manufacturing method. More specifically, the present invention relates to an illumination optical system suitable for an exposure apparatus for manufacturing a device such as a semiconductor element, an imaging element, a liquid crystal display element, and a thin film magnetic head in a lithography process.

 この種の典型的な露光装置においては、光源から射出された光が、オプティカルインテグレータとしてのフライアイレンズを介して、多数の光源からなる実質的な面光源としての二次光源(一般には照明瞳における所定の光強度分布)を形成する。以下、照明瞳での光強度分布を、「瞳強度分布」という。また、照明瞳とは、照明瞳と被照射面(露光装置の場合にはマスクまたはウェハ)との間の光学系の作用によって、被照射面が照明瞳のフーリエ変換面となるような位置として定義される。 In a typical exposure apparatus of this type, a secondary light source (generally an illumination pupil), which is a substantial surface light source composed of a number of light sources, passes through a fly-eye lens as an optical integrator. A predetermined light intensity distribution). Hereinafter, the light intensity distribution in the illumination pupil is referred to as “pupil intensity distribution”. The illumination pupil is a position where the illumination surface becomes the Fourier transform plane of the illumination pupil by the action of the optical system between the illumination pupil and the illumination surface (a mask or a wafer in the case of an exposure apparatus). Defined.

 二次光源からの光は、コンデンサーレンズにより集光された後、所定のパターンが形成されたマスクを重畳的に照明する。マスクを透過した光は投影光学系を介してウェハ上に結像し、ウェハ上にはマスクパターンが投影露光(転写)される。マスクに形成されたパターンは高集積化されており、この微細パターンをウェハ上に正確に転写するにはウェハ上において均一な照度分布を得ることが不可欠である。 The light from the secondary light source is condensed by the condenser lens and then illuminates the mask on which a predetermined pattern is formed in a superimposed manner. The light transmitted through the mask forms an image on the wafer via the projection optical system, and the mask pattern is projected and exposed (transferred) onto the wafer. The pattern formed on the mask is highly integrated, and it is indispensable to obtain a uniform illuminance distribution on the wafer in order to accurately transfer this fine pattern onto the wafer.

 マスクの微細パターンをウェハ上に正確に転写するために、例えば輪帯状や複数極状(2極状、4極状など)の瞳強度分布を形成し、投影光学系の焦点深度や解像力を向上させる技術が提案されている(特許文献1を参照)。 In order to accurately transfer the fine pattern of the mask onto the wafer, for example, an annular or multipolar (bipolar, quadrupolar, etc.) pupil intensity distribution is formed to improve the depth of focus and resolution of the projection optical system. The technique to make it is proposed (refer patent document 1).

米国特許公開第2006/0055834号公報US Patent Publication No. 2006/0055834

 マスクの微細パターンをウェハ上に忠実に転写するには、瞳強度分布を所望の形状に調整するだけでなく、最終的な被照射面としてのウェハ上の各点に関する瞳強度分布をそれぞれほぼ均一に調整する必要がある。ウェハ上の各点での瞳強度分布の均一性にばらつきがあると、ウェハ上の位置毎にパターンの線幅がばらついて、マスクの微細パターンを露光領域の全体に亘って所望の線幅でウェハ上に忠実に転写することができない。 In order to faithfully transfer the fine pattern of the mask onto the wafer, not only the pupil intensity distribution is adjusted to the desired shape, but also the pupil intensity distribution for each point on the wafer as the final irradiated surface is almost uniform. It is necessary to adjust to. If there is a variation in the uniformity of the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the wafer, the line width of the pattern varies from position to position on the wafer, and the fine pattern of the mask has the desired line width over the entire exposure area. It cannot be faithfully transferred onto the wafer.

 また、照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布の形状にかかわらず、最終的な被照射面としてのウェハ上の各点に関する瞳強度分布において光軸を挟んで所定方向に間隔を隔てた一対の領域の光強度の差が大き過ぎると、パターンが所望の位置から位置ずれして焼き付けられる恐れがある。 In addition, regardless of the shape of the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil, a pair of regions spaced in a predetermined direction across the optical axis in the pupil intensity distribution for each point on the wafer as the final irradiated surface If the difference in the light intensity is too large, the pattern may be displaced from the desired position and burned.

 本発明は、前述の課題に鑑みてなされたものであり、被照射面上の各点での瞳強度分布をそれぞれほぼ均一に調整することのできる照明光学系を提供することを目的とする。また、本発明は、被照射面上の各点での瞳強度分布をそれぞれほぼ均一に調整する照明光学系を用いて、適切な照明条件のもとで良好な露光を行うことのできる露光装置を提供することを目的とする。 The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide an illumination optical system capable of adjusting the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the irradiated surface almost uniformly. The present invention also provides an exposure apparatus that can perform good exposure under appropriate illumination conditions using an illumination optical system that adjusts the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the irradiated surface substantially uniformly. The purpose is to provide.

 さらに、本発明は、被照射面上の各点に関する瞳強度分布において光軸を挟んで所定方向に間隔を隔てた一対の領域の光強度差を調整することのできる照明光学系を提供することを目的とする。また、本発明は、被照射面上の各点に関する瞳強度分布において光軸を挟んで所定方向に間隔を隔てた一対の領域の光強度差を調整する照明光学系を用いて、適切な照明条件のもとで良好な露光を行うことのできる露光装置を提供することを目的とする。 Furthermore, the present invention provides an illumination optical system capable of adjusting a light intensity difference between a pair of regions spaced apart in a predetermined direction across an optical axis in a pupil intensity distribution related to each point on an irradiated surface. With the goal. Further, the present invention provides an appropriate illumination using an illumination optical system that adjusts the light intensity difference between a pair of regions spaced in a predetermined direction across the optical axis in the pupil intensity distribution for each point on the irradiated surface. An object of the present invention is to provide an exposure apparatus capable of performing good exposure under conditions.

 前記課題を解決するために、本発明の第1形態では、照明光学系の照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布を補正する補正ユニットであって、
 前記照明瞳の前側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子と前記照明瞳の後側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子との間の照明瞳空間に配置されて、前記照明光学系の光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第1基板と、
 前記照明瞳空間において前記第1基板よりも後側に配置されて前記光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第2基板とを備え、
 前記第1基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第1減光パターンを有し、
 前記第2基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に前記第1減光パターンに対応して形成された第2減光パターンを有し、
 前記第1減光パターンと前記第2減光パターンとの相対位置は変更可能であって、
 前記第1基板と前記第2基板との相対位置の変化および前記第1基板への光の入射角度の変化に応じて前記第1減光パターンおよび前記第2減光パターンによる減光率が変化するように構成されていることを特徴とする補正ユニットを提供する。
In order to solve the above problems, in the first embodiment of the present invention, a correction unit for correcting a pupil intensity distribution formed on an illumination pupil of an illumination optical system,
It is arranged in the illumination pupil space between the optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and the optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil, and is arranged on the optical axis of the illumination optical system. A light transmissive first substrate having a predetermined thickness along,
A light transmissive second substrate disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space and having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis;
The first substrate has a first dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The second substrate has a second dimming pattern formed corresponding to the first dimming pattern on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The relative position of the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern can be changed,
The dimming rate due to the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern changes according to a change in the relative position between the first substrate and the second substrate and a change in the incident angle of light on the first substrate. The correction unit is configured to be configured to provide a correction unit.

 本発明の第2形態では、照明光学系の照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布を補正する補正ユニットであって、
 前記照明瞳の前側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子と前記照明瞳の後側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子との間の照明瞳空間において前記照明光学系の光軸に垂直な第1面に形成された第1減光パターンと、
 前記照明瞳空間において前記第1面よりも後側に位置決めされて前記第1面と平行な第2面に形成された第2減光パターンとを備え、
 前記第1減光パターンは少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第2減光パターンは、前記少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域に対応して形成された少なくとも1つの第2単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第1単位減光領域の一部と前記第2単位減光領域の一部とが前記光軸方向から見て重なり合っていることを特徴とする補正ユニットを提供する。
In the second embodiment of the present invention, a correction unit for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil of the illumination optical system,
A first perpendicular to the optical axis of the illumination optical system in an illumination pupil space between an optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and an optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil. A first dimming pattern formed on the surface;
A second dimming pattern formed on a second surface parallel to the first surface and positioned rearward of the first surface in the illumination pupil space;
The first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming region;
The second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming region formed corresponding to the at least one first unit dimming region,
A correction unit is provided in which a part of the first unit dimming region and a part of the second unit dimming region overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis direction.

 本発明の第3形態では、照明光学系の照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布を補正する補正ユニットであって、
 前記照明瞳の前側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子と前記照明瞳の後側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子との間の照明瞳空間に配置されて、前記照明光学系の光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第1基板と、
 前記照明瞳空間において前記第1基板よりも後側に配置されて前記光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第2基板とを備え、
 前記第1基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第1減光パターンを有し、
 前記第2基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第2減光パターンを有し、
 前記第1減光パターンは少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第2減光パターンは、前記少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域に対応して形成された少なくとも1つの第2単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第1基板と前記第2基板とは、前記光軸を横切る第1方向に沿って相対移動可能に構成されていることを特徴とする補正ユニットを提供する。
In the third aspect of the present invention, a correction unit for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil of the illumination optical system,
It is arranged in an illumination pupil space between an optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and an optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil, and is arranged on the optical axis of the illumination optical system. A light transmissive first substrate having a predetermined thickness along,
A light transmissive second substrate disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space and having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis;
The first substrate has a first dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The second substrate has a second dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming region;
The second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming region formed corresponding to the at least one first unit dimming region,
The first substrate and the second substrate are configured to be relatively movable along a first direction crossing the optical axis. The correction unit is provided.

 本発明の第4形態では、照明光学系の照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布を補正する補正ユニットであって、
 前記照明瞳の前側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子と前記照明瞳の後側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子との間の照明瞳空間に配置されて、前記照明光学系の光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第1基板と、
 前記照明瞳空間において前記第1基板よりも後側に配置されて前記光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第2基板とを備え、
 前記第1基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第1減光パターンを有し、
 前記第2基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第2減光パターンを有し、
 前記第1減光パターンは少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第2減光パターンは、前記少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域に対応して形成された少なくとも1つの第2単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第1単位減光領域と前記第2単位減光領域とは、前記第1単位減光領域に第1の入射角で入射する光に対して第1の減光率を与え、且つ前記第1単位減光領域に前記第1の入射角とは異なる第2の入射角で入射する光に対して前記第1の減光率とは異なる第2の減光率を与え、
 前記第1基板と前記第2基板との位置関係は、変更可能であることを特徴とする補正ユニットを提供する。
In the fourth embodiment of the present invention, a correction unit for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil of the illumination optical system,
It is arranged in an illumination pupil space between an optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and an optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil, and is arranged on the optical axis of the illumination optical system. A light transmissive first substrate having a predetermined thickness along,
A light transmissive second substrate disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space and having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis;
The first substrate has a first dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The second substrate has a second dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming region;
The second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming region formed corresponding to the at least one first unit dimming region,
The first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region give a first dimming rate to light incident on the first unit dimming region at a first incident angle, and Giving a second light attenuation rate different from the first light attenuation rate to light incident at a second incident angle different from the first angle of incidence on the one unit light attenuation region;
The correction unit is characterized in that the positional relationship between the first substrate and the second substrate can be changed.

 本発明の第5形態では、光源からの光で被照射面を照明する照明光学系において、
 オプティカルインテグレータを有し、該オプティカルインテグレータよりも後側の照明瞳に瞳強度分布を形成する分布形成光学系と、
 前記後側の照明瞳を含む前記照明瞳空間に配置された第1形態乃至第4形態のいずれか1つの補正ユニットとを備えていることを特徴とする照明光学系を提供する。
In the fifth embodiment of the present invention, in the illumination optical system that illuminates the illuminated surface with light from the light source,
A distribution forming optical system having an optical integrator and forming a pupil intensity distribution in an illumination pupil on the rear side of the optical integrator;
An illumination optical system comprising: a correction unit according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments arranged in the illumination pupil space including the rear illumination pupil.

 本発明の第6形態では、光源からの光で被照射面を照明する照明光学系において、
 オプティカルインテグレータを有し、該オプティカルインテグレータよりも後側の照明瞳に瞳強度分布を形成する分布形成光学系と、
 前記後側の照明瞳を含む前記照明瞳空間に配置された第1形態乃至第4形態のいずれか1つの補正ユニットとを備え、
 前記オプティカルインテグレータは所定方向に沿って細長い矩形状の単位波面分割面を有し、前記所定方向は前記補正ユニットにおける第1方向に対応していることを特徴とする照明光学系を提供する。
In the sixth aspect of the present invention, in the illumination optical system that illuminates the illuminated surface with light from the light source,
A distribution forming optical system having an optical integrator and forming a pupil intensity distribution in an illumination pupil on the rear side of the optical integrator;
A correction unit according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments arranged in the illumination pupil space including the rear illumination pupil,
The optical integrator has an elongated rectangular unit wavefront dividing surface along a predetermined direction, and the predetermined direction corresponds to a first direction in the correction unit.

 本発明の第7形態では、所定のパターンを照明するための第5形態または第6形態の照明光学系を備え、前記所定のパターンを感光性基板に露光することを特徴とする露光装置を提供する。 According to a seventh aspect of the present invention, there is provided an exposure apparatus comprising the illumination optical system according to the fifth or sixth aspect for illuminating a predetermined pattern, and exposing the predetermined pattern onto a photosensitive substrate. To do.

 本発明の第8形態では、第7形態の露光装置を用いて、前記所定のパターンを前記感光性基板に露光する露光工程と、
 前記所定のパターンが転写された前記感光性基板を現像し、前記所定のパターンに対応する形状のマスク層を前記感光性基板の表面に形成する現像工程と、
 前記マスク層を介して前記感光性基板の表面を加工する加工工程とを含むことを特徴とするデバイス製造方法を提供する。
In the eighth embodiment of the present invention, an exposure step of exposing the predetermined pattern to the photosensitive substrate using the exposure apparatus of the seventh embodiment;
Developing the photosensitive substrate to which the predetermined pattern is transferred, and forming a mask layer having a shape corresponding to the predetermined pattern on the surface of the photosensitive substrate;
And a processing step of processing the surface of the photosensitive substrate through the mask layer.

 本発明の第1形態にかかる照明光学系は、オプティカルインテグレータよりも後側の照明瞳を含む照明瞳空間に配置されて照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布を補正する補正ユニットを備えている。補正ユニットは、第1減光パターンが形成された第1基板と、その後側に配置されて第2減光パターンが形成された第2基板とを備え、第1減光パターンと第2減光パターンとの相対位置は変更可能である。また、補正ユニットは、第1基板と第2基板との相対位置の変化および第1基板への光の入射角度の変化に応じて第1減光パターンおよび第2減光パターンによる減光率が変化するように構成されている。 The illumination optical system according to the first embodiment of the present invention includes a correction unit that is arranged in an illumination pupil space including an illumination pupil on the rear side of the optical integrator and corrects a pupil intensity distribution formed in the illumination pupil. The correction unit includes a first substrate on which a first dimming pattern is formed, and a second substrate disposed on the rear side thereof and on which a second dimming pattern is formed, and the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern are provided. The relative position to the pattern can be changed. Further, the correction unit has a dimming rate by the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern in accordance with a change in the relative position between the first substrate and the second substrate and a change in the incident angle of the light to the first substrate. It is configured to change.

 その結果、補正ユニットの減光作用により、被照射面上の各点に関する瞳強度分布をそれぞれ独立的に調整することができ、ひいては各点に関する瞳強度分布を互いにほぼ同じ性状の分布に調整することが可能である。したがって、本発明の第1形態にかかる照明光学系では、例えば被照射面上の各点での瞳強度分布を一律に調整する濃度フィルターと、各点に関する瞳強度分布をそれぞれ独立的に調整する補正ユニットとの協働作用により、被照射面上の各点での瞳強度分布をそれぞれほぼ均一に調整することができる。また、本発明の露光装置では、被照射面上の各点での瞳強度分布をそれぞれほぼ均一に調整する照明光学系を用いて、適切な照明条件のもとで良好な露光を行うことができ、ひいては良好なデバイスを製造することができる。 As a result, the dimming action of the correction unit can independently adjust the pupil intensity distribution for each point on the irradiated surface, and consequently the pupil intensity distribution for each point is adjusted to a distribution having substantially the same properties. It is possible. Therefore, in the illumination optical system according to the first aspect of the present invention, for example, the density filter that uniformly adjusts the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the irradiated surface and the pupil intensity distribution at each point are independently adjusted. Due to the cooperative action with the correction unit, the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the irradiated surface can be adjusted substantially uniformly. In the exposure apparatus of the present invention, it is possible to perform good exposure under appropriate illumination conditions using an illumination optical system that adjusts the pupil intensity distribution at each point on the irradiated surface almost uniformly. And by extension, a good device can be manufactured.

 本発明の第3形態にかかる照明光学系は、オプティカルインテグレータよりも後側の照明瞳の直前または直後の位置に配置された一対の基板からなる補正ユニットを備えている。第1基板の入射面または射出面には少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域が形成され、第2基板の入射面または射出面には第1単位減光領域に対応して少なくとも1つの第2単位減光領域が形成されている。第1基板と第2基板とは、例えばオプティカルインテグレータの単位波面分割面の長辺方向に沿って相対移動可能に構成されている。 The illumination optical system according to the third embodiment of the present invention includes a correction unit including a pair of substrates disposed immediately before or immediately after the illumination pupil on the rear side of the optical integrator. At least one first unit attenuation region is formed on the incident surface or exit surface of the first substrate, and at least one second unit attenuation region is formed on the incident surface or exit surface of the second substrate corresponding to the first unit attenuation region. A unit dimming region is formed. For example, the first substrate and the second substrate are configured to be relatively movable along the long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface of the optical integrator.

 この構成により、補正ユニットは、被照射面の所定方向に沿って減光率が様々な態様にしたがって変化する多様な減光率特性を実現する。したがって、本発明の第3形態にかかる照明光学系では、補正ユニットの多様な減光作用により、被照射面上の各点に関する瞳強度分布において光軸を挟んで所定方向に間隔を隔てた一対の領域の光強度差を調整することができる。また、本発明の露光装置では、被照射面上の各点に関する瞳強度分布において光軸を挟んで所定方向に間隔を隔てた一対の領域の光強度差を調整する照明光学系を用いて、適切な照明条件のもとで良好な露光を行うことができ、ひいては良好なデバイスを製造することができる。 With this configuration, the correction unit realizes various dimming rate characteristics in which the dimming rate varies according to various modes along a predetermined direction of the irradiated surface. Therefore, in the illumination optical system according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a pair of pupil intensity distributions related to each point on the irradiated surface are spaced apart in a predetermined direction across the optical axis by various dimming effects of the correction unit. The light intensity difference in the region can be adjusted. Further, in the exposure apparatus of the present invention, using an illumination optical system that adjusts the light intensity difference between a pair of regions spaced in a predetermined direction across the optical axis in the pupil intensity distribution for each point on the irradiated surface, Good exposure can be performed under appropriate illumination conditions, and thus a good device can be manufactured.

本発明の第1実施形態にかかる露光装置の構成を概略的に示す図である。1 is a drawing schematically showing a configuration of an exposure apparatus according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 第1実施形態において照明瞳に形成される4極状の二次光源を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the quadrupolar secondary light source formed in an illumination pupil in 1st Embodiment. 各実施形態においてウェハ上に形成される矩形状の静止露光領域を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the rectangular-shaped static exposure area | region formed on a wafer in each embodiment. 第1実施形態において静止露光領域内の中心点P1に入射する光が形成する4極状の瞳強度分布の性状を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the property of the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution which the light which injects into the center point P1 in a still exposure area | region in 1st Embodiment forms. 第1実施形態において静止露光領域内の周辺点P2,P3に入射する光が形成する4極状の瞳強度分布の性状を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the property of quadrupole pupil intensity distribution which the light which injects into the peripheral points P2 and P3 in a still exposure area | region in 1st Embodiment forms. (a)は第1実施形態において中心点P1に関する瞳強度分布のZ方向に沿った光強度分布を、(b)は第1実施形態において周辺点P2,P3に関する瞳強度分布のZ方向に沿った光強度分布を模式的に示す図である。(A) shows the light intensity distribution along the Z direction of the pupil intensity distribution related to the center point P1 in the first embodiment, and (b) shows the light intensity distribution along the Z direction of the pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically light intensity distribution. 第1実施形態の補正ユニットの構成を概略的に示す第1の図である。It is the 1st figure showing roughly the composition of the amendment unit of a 1st embodiment. 第1実施形態の補正ユニットの構成を概略的に示す第2の図である。It is a 2nd figure which shows schematically the structure of the correction | amendment unit of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態の補正ユニットの構成を概略的に示す第3の図である。It is a 3rd figure which shows schematically the structure of the correction | amendment unit of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態の補正ユニットの基本的な作用を説明する第1の図である。It is a 1st figure explaining the basic effect | action of the correction | amendment unit of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態の補正ユニットの基本的な作用を説明する第2の図である。It is a 2nd figure explaining the basic effect | action of the correction | amendment unit of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態の補正ユニットの基本的な作用を説明する第3の図である。It is a 3rd figure explaining the basic effect | action of the correction | amendment unit of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態の補正ユニットの基本的な作用を説明する第4の図である。It is a 4th figure explaining the basic effect | action of the correction | amendment unit of 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態において中心点P1に関する瞳強度分布が補正ユニットにより調整される様子を模式的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows typically a mode that the pupil intensity distribution regarding the center point P1 is adjusted by the correction unit in 1st Embodiment. 第1実施形態において周辺点P2,P3に関する瞳強度分布が補正ユニットにより調整される様子を模式的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows typically a mode that the pupil intensity distribution regarding the peripheral points P2, P3 is adjusted by the correction unit in the first embodiment. 第1実施形態の変形例にかかる補正ユニットの構成を概略的に示す第1の図である。It is the 1st figure showing roughly the composition of the amendment unit concerning the modification of a 1st embodiment. (a)は図16の変形例にかかる補正ユニットの第1基板に複数の遮光性の線状領域が形成されている様子を、(b)は第2基板に複数の遮光性の線状領域が形成されている様子を示す図である。16A shows a state where a plurality of light-shielding linear regions are formed on the first substrate of the correction unit according to the modification of FIG. 16, and FIG. 9B shows a plurality of light-shielding linear regions on the second substrate. It is a figure which shows a mode that is formed. 図16の変形例にかかる補正ユニットの基本的な作用を説明する第1の図である。It is a 1st figure explaining the basic effect | action of the correction | amendment unit concerning the modification of FIG. 図16の変形例にかかる補正ユニットの基本的な作用を説明する第2の図である。It is the 2nd figure explaining the fundamental effect | action of the correction | amendment unit concerning the modification of FIG. 図16の変形例にかかる補正ユニットの基本的な作用を説明する第3の図である。It is the 3rd figure explaining the fundamental effect | action of the correction | amendment unit concerning the modification of FIG. 本発明の第2実施形態にかかる露光装置の構成を概略的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows schematically the structure of the exposure apparatus concerning 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 第2実施形態において照明瞳に形成される4極状の二次光源を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the quadrupolar secondary light source formed in an illumination pupil in 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態において静止露光領域内の周辺点P2に入射する光が形成する4極状の瞳強度分布の性状を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the property of quadrupole pupil intensity distribution which the light which injects into the peripheral point P2 in a still exposure area | region in 2nd Embodiment forms. 第2実施形態において静止露光領域内の周辺点P3に入射する光が形成する4極状の瞳強度分布の性状を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the property of quadrupole pupil intensity distribution which the light which injects into the peripheral point P3 in a still exposure area | region in 2nd Embodiment forms. 第2実施形態の補正ユニットの構成を概略的に示す第1の図である。It is the 1st figure showing roughly the composition of the amendment unit of a 2nd embodiment. 第2実施形態の補正ユニットの構成を概略的に示す第2の図である。It is a 2nd figure which shows schematically the structure of the correction | amendment unit of 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態の補正ユニットの構成を概略的に示す第3の図である。It is a 3rd figure which shows schematically the structure of the correction | amendment unit of 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態の補正ユニットの基本的な作用を説明する第1の図である。It is a 1st figure explaining the basic effect | action of the correction | amendment unit of 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態の補正ユニットの基本的な作用を説明する第2の図である。It is a 2nd figure explaining the basic effect | action of the correction | amendment unit of 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態の補正ユニットの基本的な作用を説明する第3の図である。It is a 3rd figure explaining the basic effect | action of the correction | amendment unit of 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態において第1基板に対する第2基板および第3基板の第1の相対位置と補正ユニットの減光作用との関係を説明する図である。It is a figure explaining the relationship between the 1st relative position of the 2nd substrate and the 3rd substrate to the 1st substrate in the 2nd embodiment, and the dimming effect of a correction unit. 図31の補正ユニットが一対の面光源に及ぼす減光作用の大きさを模式的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows typically the magnitude | size of the light reduction effect which the correction | amendment unit of FIG. 31 exerts on a pair of surface light source. 第2実施形態において第1基板に対して第2基板および第3基板を第2の相対位置に設定したときに補正ユニットが一対の面光源に及ぼす減光作用の大きさを模式的に示す図である。The figure which shows typically the magnitude | size of the dimming effect which a correction unit exerts on a pair of surface light source when a 2nd board | substrate and a 3rd board | substrate are set to the 2nd relative position with respect to a 1st board | substrate in 2nd Embodiment. It is. 第2実施形態において第1基板に対して第2基板および第3基板を第3の相対位置に設定したときに補正ユニットが一対の面光源に及ぼす減光作用の大きさを模式的に示す図である。The figure which shows typically the magnitude | size of the dimming effect which a correction unit exerts on a pair of surface light source when a 2nd board | substrate and a 3rd board | substrate are set to the 3rd relative position with respect to a 1st board | substrate in 2nd Embodiment. It is. 第2実施形態において周辺点P2に関する瞳強度分布が補正ユニットにより調整される様子を模式的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows typically a mode that the pupil intensity distribution regarding the peripheral point P2 is adjusted by the correction unit in 2nd Embodiment. 第2実施形態において周辺点P3に関する瞳強度分布が補正ユニットにより調整される様子を模式的に示す図である。It is a figure which shows typically a mode that the pupil intensity distribution regarding the peripheral point P3 is adjusted by the correction unit in 2nd Embodiment. 半導体デバイスの製造工程を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the manufacturing process of a semiconductor device. 液晶表示素子等の液晶デバイスの製造工程を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the manufacturing process of liquid crystal devices, such as a liquid crystal display element.

 本発明の実施形態を、添付図面に基づいて説明する。図1は、本発明の第1実施形態にかかる露光装置の構成を概略的に示す図である。図1において、感光性基板であるウェハWの露光面(転写面)の法線方向に沿ってZ軸を、ウェハWの露光面内において図1の紙面に平行な方向にY軸を、ウェハWの露光面内において図1の紙面に垂直な方向にX軸をそれぞれ設定している。 Embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a drawing schematically showing a configuration of an exposure apparatus according to the first embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 1, the Z axis along the normal direction of the exposure surface (transfer surface) of the wafer W, which is a photosensitive substrate, and the Y axis in the direction parallel to the paper surface of FIG. In the W exposure plane, the X axis is set in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.

 図1を参照すると、第1実施形態の露光装置では、光源1から露光光(照明光)が供給される。光源1として、たとえば193nmの波長の光を供給するArFエキシマレーザ光源や248nmの波長の光を供給するKrFエキシマレーザ光源などを用いることができる。光源1から射出された光束は、整形光学系2および輪帯照明用の回折光学素子3を介して、アフォーカルレンズ4に入射する。整形光学系2は、光源1からのほぼ平行な光束を所定の矩形状の断面を有するほぼ平行な光束に変換して回折光学素子3へ導く機能を有する。 Referring to FIG. 1, exposure light (illumination light) is supplied from a light source 1 in the exposure apparatus of the first embodiment. As the light source 1, for example, an ArF excimer laser light source that supplies light with a wavelength of 193 nm, a KrF excimer laser light source that supplies light with a wavelength of 248 nm, or the like can be used. The light beam emitted from the light source 1 enters the afocal lens 4 via the shaping optical system 2 and the diffractive optical element 3 for annular illumination. The shaping optical system 2 has a function of converting a substantially parallel light beam from the light source 1 into a substantially parallel light beam having a predetermined rectangular cross section and guiding it to the diffractive optical element 3.

 アフォーカルレンズ4は、その前側焦点位置と回折光学素子3の位置とがほぼ一致し且つその後側焦点位置と図中破線で示す所定面IPの位置とがほぼ一致するように設定されたアフォーカル系(無焦点光学系)である。回折光学素子3は、基板に露光光(照明光)の波長程度のピッチを有する段差を形成することによって構成され、入射ビームを所望の角度に回折する作用を有する。具体的に、輪帯照明用の回折光学素子3は、矩形状の断面を有する平行光束が入射した場合に、ファーフィールド(またはフラウンホーファー回折領域)に輪帯状の光強度分布を形成する機能を有する。 The afocal lens 4 is set so that the front focal position thereof and the position of the diffractive optical element 3 substantially coincide with each other, and the rear focal position thereof substantially coincides with the position of the predetermined plane IP indicated by a broken line in the drawing. System (non-focal optical system). The diffractive optical element 3 is formed by forming a step having a pitch of about the wavelength of exposure light (illumination light) on the substrate, and has a function of diffracting an incident beam to a desired angle. Specifically, the diffractive optical element 3 for annular illumination has a function of forming an annular light intensity distribution in the far field (or Fraunhofer diffraction region) when a parallel light beam having a rectangular cross section is incident. Have.

 したがって、回折光学素子3に入射したほぼ平行光束は、アフォーカルレンズ4の瞳面に輪帯状の光強度分布を形成した後、輪帯状の角度分布でアフォーカルレンズ4から射出される。アフォーカルレンズ4の前側レンズ群4aと後側レンズ群4bとの間の光路中において、その瞳位置またはその近傍には、濃度フィルター5および円錐アキシコン系6が配置されている。濃度フィルター5は平行平面板の形態を有し、その光学面にはクロムや酸化クロム等からなる遮光性ドットの濃密パターンが形成されている。すなわち、濃度フィルター5は、光の入射位置に応じて透過率の異なる透過率分布を有する。濃度フィルター5の具体的な作用、並びに円錐アキシコン系6の構成および作用については後述する。 Therefore, the substantially parallel light beam incident on the diffractive optical element 3 forms an annular light intensity distribution on the pupil plane of the afocal lens 4 and then exits from the afocal lens 4 with an annular angular distribution. In the optical path between the front lens group 4a and the rear lens group 4b of the afocal lens 4, a density filter 5 and a conical axicon system 6 are disposed at or near the pupil position. The density filter 5 has a form of a plane parallel plate, and a dense pattern of light-shielding dots made of chromium, chromium oxide or the like is formed on the optical surface thereof. That is, the density filter 5 has a transmittance distribution with different transmittances depending on the incident position of light. The specific operation of the density filter 5 and the configuration and operation of the conical axicon system 6 will be described later.

 アフォーカルレンズ4を介した光は、σ値(σ値=照明光学系のマスク側開口数/投影光学系のマスク側開口数)可変用のズームレンズ7を介して、オプティカルインテグレータとしてのマイクロフライアイレンズ(またはフライアイレンズ)8に入射する。マイクロフライアイレンズ8は、例えば縦横に且つ稠密に配列された多数の正屈折力を有する微小レンズからなる光学素子であって、平行平面板にエッチング処理を施して微小レンズ群を形成することによって構成されている。 The light passing through the afocal lens 4 passes through a zoom lens 7 for varying a σ value (σ value = mask-side numerical aperture of the illumination optical system / mask-side numerical aperture of the projection optical system), and is a micro fly as an optical integrator. The light enters the eye lens (or fly eye lens) 8. The micro fly's eye lens 8 is, for example, an optical element composed of a large number of micro lenses having positive refracting power arranged vertically and horizontally and densely, and by performing etching treatment on a parallel plane plate, a micro lens group is formed. It is configured.

 マイクロフライアイレンズを構成する各微小レンズは、フライアイレンズを構成する各レンズエレメントよりも微小である。また、マイクロフライアイレンズは、互いに隔絶されたレンズエレメントからなるフライアイレンズとは異なり、多数の微小レンズ(微小屈折面)が互いに隔絶されることなく一体的に形成されている。しかしながら、正屈折力を有するレンズ要素が縦横に配置されている点でマイクロフライアイレンズはフライアイレンズと同じ波面分割型のオプティカルインテグレータである。なお、マイクロフライアイレンズ8として、例えばシリンドリカルマイクロフライアイレンズを用いることもできる。シリンドリカルマイクロフライアイレンズの構成および作用は、例えば米国特許第6913373号公報に開示されている。 Each micro lens constituting the micro fly's eye lens is smaller than each lens element constituting the fly eye lens. Further, unlike a fly-eye lens composed of lens elements isolated from each other, a micro fly-eye lens is formed integrally with a large number of micro lenses (micro refractive surfaces) without being isolated from each other. However, the micro fly's eye lens is the same wavefront division type optical integrator as the fly eye lens in that lens elements having positive refractive power are arranged vertically and horizontally. As the micro fly's eye lens 8, for example, a cylindrical micro fly's eye lens can be used. The configuration and action of the cylindrical micro fly's eye lens are disclosed in, for example, US Pat. No. 6,913,373.

 所定面IPの位置はズームレンズ7の前側焦点位置またはその近傍に配置され、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の入射面はズームレンズ7の後側焦点位置またはその近傍に配置されている。換言すると、ズームレンズ7は、所定面IPとマイクロフライアイレンズ8の入射面とを実質的にフーリエ変換の関係に配置し、ひいてはアフォーカルレンズ4の瞳面とマイクロフライアイレンズ8の入射面とを光学的にほぼ共役に配置している。 The position of the predetermined plane IP is disposed at or near the front focal position of the zoom lens 7, and the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 is disposed at or near the rear focal position of the zoom lens 7. In other words, the zoom lens 7 arranges the predetermined plane IP and the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 substantially in a Fourier transform relationship, and consequently the pupil surface of the afocal lens 4 and the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8. Are arranged almost conjugate optically.

 したがって、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の入射面上には、アフォーカルレンズ4の瞳面と同様に、たとえば光軸AXを中心とした輪帯状の照野が形成される。この輪帯状の照野の全体形状は、ズームレンズ7の焦点距離に依存して相似的に変化する。マイクロフライアイレンズ8における各微小レンズの入射面(すなわち単位波面分割面)は、例えばY方向に沿って長辺を有し且つX方向に沿って短辺を有する矩形状であって、マスクM上において形成すべき照明領域の形状(ひいてはウェハW上において形成すべき露光領域の形状)と相似な矩形状である。 Therefore, on the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8, for example, an annular illumination field centered on the optical axis AX is formed in the same manner as the pupil surface of the afocal lens 4. The overall shape of the annular illumination field changes in a similar manner depending on the focal length of the zoom lens 7. The entrance surface (that is, the unit wavefront dividing surface) of each microlens in the micro fly's eye lens 8 is, for example, a rectangular shape having a long side along the Y direction and a short side along the X direction. It has a rectangular shape similar to the shape of the illumination area to be formed above (and thus the shape of the exposure area to be formed on the wafer W).

 マイクロフライアイレンズ8に入射した光束は二次元的に分割され、その後側焦点面またはその近傍の位置(ひいては照明瞳の位置)には、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の入射面に形成される照野とほぼ同じ光強度分布を有する二次光源、すなわち光軸AXを中心とした輪帯状の実質的な面光源からなる二次光源(瞳強度分布)が形成される。マイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍には、補正ユニット9が配置されている。補正ユニット9の構成および作用については後述する。 The light beam incident on the micro fly's eye lens 8 is two-dimensionally divided, and an illumination field formed on the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 at the rear focal plane or a position in the vicinity thereof (and hence the position of the illumination pupil). A secondary light source having substantially the same light intensity distribution as the light source, that is, a secondary light source (pupil intensity distribution) composed of a ring-shaped substantial surface light source centered on the optical axis AX. A correction unit 9 is disposed at or near the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8. The configuration and operation of the correction unit 9 will be described later.

 また、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍には、必要に応じて、輪帯状の二次光源に対応した輪帯状の開口部(光透過部)を有する照明開口絞り(不図示)が配置されている。照明開口絞りは、照明光路に対して挿脱自在に構成され、且つ大きさおよび形状の異なる開口部を有する複数の開口絞りと切り換え可能に構成されている。開口絞りの切り換え方式として、たとえば周知のターレット方式やスライド方式などを用いることができる。照明開口絞りは、後述する投影光学系PLの入射瞳面と光学的にほぼ共役な位置に配置され、二次光源の照明に寄与する範囲を規定する。 An illumination aperture stop (not shown) having a ring-shaped opening (light transmitting part) corresponding to a ring-shaped secondary light source on the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or in the vicinity thereof if necessary. ) Is arranged. The illumination aperture stop is configured to be detachable with respect to the illumination optical path, and is configured to be switchable with a plurality of aperture stops having apertures having different sizes and shapes. As an aperture stop switching method, for example, a well-known turret method or slide method can be used. The illumination aperture stop is disposed at a position optically conjugate with an entrance pupil plane of the projection optical system PL described later, and defines a range that contributes to illumination of the secondary light source.

 マイクロフライアイレンズ8および補正ユニット9を経た光は、コンデンサー光学系10を介して、マスクブラインド11を重畳的に照明する。こうして、照明視野絞りとしてのマスクブラインド11には、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の微小レンズの形状と焦点距離とに応じた矩形状の照野が形成される。マスクブラインド11の矩形状の開口部(光透過部)を経た光は、前側レンズ群12aと後側レンズ群12bとからなる結像光学系12を介して、所定のパターンが形成されたマスクMを重畳的に照明する。すなわち、結像光学系12は、マスクブラインド11の矩形状開口部の像をマスクM上に形成することになる。 The light that has passed through the micro fly's eye lens 8 and the correction unit 9 illuminates the mask blind 11 in a superimposed manner via the condenser optical system 10. Thus, a rectangular illumination field corresponding to the shape and focal length of the microlens of the micro fly's eye lens 8 is formed on the mask blind 11 as an illumination field stop. The light that has passed through the rectangular opening (light transmission portion) of the mask blind 11 passes through the imaging optical system 12 including the front lens group 12a and the rear lens group 12b, and the mask M on which a predetermined pattern is formed. Are illuminated in a superimposed manner. That is, the imaging optical system 12 forms an image of the rectangular opening of the mask blind 11 on the mask M.

 マスクステージMS上に保持されたマスクMには転写すべきパターンが形成されており、パターン領域全体のうちY方向に沿って長辺を有し且つX方向に沿って短辺を有する矩形状(スリット状)のパターン領域が照明される。マスクMのパターン領域を透過した光は、投影光学系PLを介して、ウェハステージWS上に保持されたウェハ(感光性基板)W上にマスクパターンの像を形成する。すなわち、マスクM上での矩形状の照明領域に光学的に対応するように、ウェハW上においてもY方向に沿って長辺を有し且つX方向に沿って短辺を有する矩形状の静止露光領域(実効露光領域)にパターン像が形成される。 A pattern to be transferred is formed on the mask M held on the mask stage MS, and a rectangular shape having a long side along the Y direction and a short side along the X direction in the entire pattern region ( The pattern area of the slit shape is illuminated. The light transmitted through the pattern area of the mask M forms an image of the mask pattern on the wafer (photosensitive substrate) W held on the wafer stage WS via the projection optical system PL. That is, a rectangular stationary image having a long side along the Y direction and a short side along the X direction on the wafer W so as to optically correspond to the rectangular illumination area on the mask M. A pattern image is formed in the exposure area (effective exposure area).

 こうして、いわゆるステップ・アンド・スキャン方式にしたがって、投影光学系PLの光軸AXと直交する平面(XY平面)内において、X方向(走査方向)に沿ってマスクステージMSとウェハステージWSとを、ひいてはマスクMとウェハWとを同期的に移動(走査)させることにより、ウェハW上には静止露光領域のY方向寸法に等しい幅を有し且つウェハWの走査量(移動量)に応じた長さを有するショット領域(露光領域)に対してマスクパターンが走査露光される。 Thus, according to the so-called step-and-scan method, the mask stage MS and the wafer stage WS along the X direction (scanning direction) in the plane (XY plane) orthogonal to the optical axis AX of the projection optical system PL, As a result, by moving (scanning) the mask M and the wafer W synchronously, the wafer W has a width equal to the dimension in the Y direction of the static exposure region and corresponds to the scanning amount (movement amount) of the wafer W. A mask pattern is scanned and exposed to a shot area (exposure area) having a length.

 円錐アキシコン系6は、光源側から順に、光源側に平面を向け且つマスク側に凹円錐状の屈折面を向けた第1プリズム部材6aと、マスク側に平面を向け且つ光源側に凸円錐状の屈折面を向けた第2プリズム部材6bとから構成されている。そして、第1プリズム部材6aの凹円錐状の屈折面と第2プリズム部材6bの凸円錐状の屈折面とは、互いに当接可能なように相補的に形成されている。また、第1プリズム部材6aおよび第2プリズム部材6bのうち少なくとも一方の部材が光軸AXに沿って移動可能に構成され、第1プリズム部材6aと第2プリズム部材6bとの間隔が可変に構成されている。 The conical axicon system 6 includes, in order from the light source side, a first prism member 6a having a flat surface facing the light source side and a concave conical refractive surface facing the mask side, and a convex conical shape facing the plane toward the mask side and the light source side. And a second prism member 6b facing the refractive surface. The concave conical refracting surface of the first prism member 6a and the convex conical refracting surface of the second prism member 6b are complementarily formed so as to be in contact with each other. Further, at least one of the first prism member 6a and the second prism member 6b is configured to be movable along the optical axis AX, and the interval between the first prism member 6a and the second prism member 6b is configured to be variable. Has been.

 ここで、第1プリズム部材6aと第2プリズム部材6bとが互いに当接している状態では、円錐アキシコン系6は平行平面板として機能し、形成される輪帯状の二次光源に及ぼす影響はない。しかしながら、第1プリズム部材6aと第2プリズム部材6bとを離間させると、輪帯状の二次光源の幅(輪帯状の二次光源の外径と内径との差の1/2)を一定に保ちつつ、輪帯状の二次光源の外径(内径)が変化する。すなわち、輪帯状の二次光源の輪帯比(内径/外径)および大きさ(外径)が変化する。 Here, in a state where the first prism member 6a and the second prism member 6b are in contact with each other, the conical axicon system 6 functions as a plane parallel plate and has no effect on the annular secondary light source formed. . However, if the first prism member 6a and the second prism member 6b are separated from each other, the width of the annular secondary light source (1/2 of the difference between the outer diameter and the inner diameter of the annular secondary light source) becomes constant. While maintaining, the outer diameter (inner diameter) of the annular secondary light source changes. That is, the annular ratio (inner diameter / outer diameter) and size (outer diameter) of the annular secondary light source change.

 ズームレンズ7は、輪帯状の二次光源の全体形状を相似的に拡大または縮小する機能を有する。たとえば、ズームレンズ7の焦点距離を最小値から所定の値へ拡大させることにより、輪帯状の二次光源の全体形状が相似的に拡大される。換言すると、ズームレンズ7の作用により、輪帯状の二次光源の輪帯比が変化することなく、その幅および大きさ(外径)がともに変化する。このように、円錐アキシコン系6およびズームレンズ7の作用により、輪帯状の二次光源の輪帯比と大きさ(外径)とを制御することができる。 The zoom lens 7 has a function of enlarging or reducing the entire shape of the annular secondary light source in a similar manner. For example, by enlarging the focal length of the zoom lens 7 from a minimum value to a predetermined value, the entire shape of the annular secondary light source is similarly enlarged. In other words, due to the action of the zoom lens 7, both the width and size (outer diameter) change without changing the annular ratio of the annular secondary light source. As described above, the annular ratio and size (outer diameter) of the annular secondary light source can be controlled by the action of the conical axicon system 6 and the zoom lens 7.

 第1実施形態では、上述したように、マイクロフライアイレンズ8により形成される二次光源を光源として、照明光学系(2~12)の被照射面に配置されるマスクMをケーラー照明する。このため、二次光源が形成される位置は投影光学系PLの開口絞りASの位置と光学的に共役であり、二次光源の形成面を照明光学系(2~12)の照明瞳面と呼ぶことができる。典型的には、照明瞳面に対して被照射面(マスクMが配置される面、または投影光学系PLを含めて照明光学系と考える場合にはウェハWが配置される面)が光学的なフーリエ変換面となる。 In the first embodiment, as described above, the secondary light source formed by the micro fly's eye lens 8 is used as a light source, and the mask M arranged on the irradiated surface of the illumination optical system (2 to 12) is Koehler illuminated. For this reason, the position where the secondary light source is formed is optically conjugate with the position of the aperture stop AS of the projection optical system PL, and the formation surface of the secondary light source is the illumination pupil plane of the illumination optical system (2 to 12). Can be called. Typically, the irradiated surface (the surface on which the mask M is disposed or the surface on which the wafer W is disposed when the illumination optical system including the projection optical system PL is considered) is optical with respect to the illumination pupil plane. A Fourier transform plane.

 なお、瞳強度分布とは、照明光学系(2~12)の照明瞳面または当該照明瞳面と光学的に共役な面における光強度分布(輝度分布)である。マイクロフライアイレンズ8による波面分割数が比較的大きい場合、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の入射面に形成される大局的な光強度分布と、二次光源全体の大局的な光強度分布(瞳強度分布)とが高い相関を示す。このため、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の入射面および当該入射面と光学的に共役な面における光強度分布についても瞳強度分布と称することができる。図1の構成において、回折光学素子3、アフォーカルレンズ4、ズームレンズ7、およびマイクロフライアイレンズ8は、マイクロフライアイレンズ8よりも後側の照明瞳に瞳強度分布を形成する分布形成光学系を構成している。 The pupil intensity distribution is a light intensity distribution (luminance distribution) on the illumination pupil plane of the illumination optical system (2 to 12) or a plane optically conjugate with the illumination pupil plane. When the number of wavefront divisions by the micro fly's eye lens 8 is relatively large, the overall light intensity distribution formed on the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 and the overall light intensity distribution of the entire secondary light source (pupil intensity distribution). ) And a high correlation. For this reason, the light intensity distribution on the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 and the surface optically conjugate with the incident surface can also be referred to as a pupil intensity distribution. In the configuration of FIG. 1, the diffractive optical element 3, the afocal lens 4, the zoom lens 7, and the micro fly's eye lens 8 are distribution forming optics that form a pupil intensity distribution in the illumination pupil behind the micro fly's eye lens 8. The system is configured.

 輪帯照明用の回折光学素子3に代えて、複数極照明(2極照明、4極照明、8極照明など)用の回折光学素子(不図示)を照明光路中に設定することによって、複数極照明を行うことができる。複数極照明用の回折光学素子は、矩形状の断面を有する平行光束が入射した場合に、ファーフィールドに複数極状(2極状、4極状、8極状など)の光強度分布を形成する機能を有する。したがって、複数極照明用の回折光学素子を介した光束は、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の入射面に、たとえば光軸AXを中心とした複数の所定形状(円弧状、円形状など)の照野からなる複数極状の照野を形成する。その結果、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍にも、その入射面に形成された照野と同じ複数極状の二次光源が形成される。 In place of the diffractive optical element 3 for annular illumination, a plurality of diffractive optical elements (not shown) for multipole illumination (dipole illumination, quadrupole illumination, octupole illumination, etc.) are set in the illumination optical path. Polar lighting can be performed. A diffractive optical element for multipole illumination forms a light intensity distribution of multiple poles (bipolar, quadrupole, octupole, etc.) in the far field when a parallel light beam having a rectangular cross section is incident. It has the function to do. Accordingly, the light beam that has passed through the diffractive optical element for multipole illumination is incident on the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 from, for example, an illumination field having a plurality of predetermined shapes (arc shape, circular shape, etc.) centered on the optical axis AX. To form a multipolar illuminator. As a result, the same multipolar secondary light source as the illumination field formed on the incident surface is also formed on or near the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8.

 また、輪帯照明用の回折光学素子3に代えて、円形照明用の回折光学素子(不図示)を照明光路中に設定することによって、通常の円形照明を行うことができる。円形照明用の回折光学素子は、矩形状の断面を有する平行光束が入射した場合に、ファーフィールドに円形状の光強度分布を形成する機能を有する。したがって、円形照明用の回折光学素子を介した光束は、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の入射面に、たとえば光軸AXを中心とした円形状の照野を形成する。その結果、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍にも、その入射面に形成された照野と同じ円形状の二次光源が形成される。また、輪帯照明用の回折光学素子3に代えて、適当な特性を有する回折光学素子(不図示)を照明光路中に設定することによって、様々な形態の変形照明を行うことができる。回折光学素子3の切り換え方式として、たとえば周知のターレット方式やスライド方式などを用いることができる。 Also, instead of the diffractive optical element 3 for annular illumination, a normal circular illumination can be performed by setting a diffractive optical element (not shown) for circular illumination in the illumination optical path. The diffractive optical element for circular illumination has a function of forming a circular light intensity distribution in the far field when a parallel light beam having a rectangular cross section is incident. Therefore, the light beam that has passed through the diffractive optical element for circular illumination forms, for example, a circular illumination field around the optical axis AX on the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8. As a result, a secondary light source having the same circular shape as the illumination field formed on the incident surface is also formed on or near the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8. Also, instead of the diffractive optical element 3 for annular illumination, various forms of modified illumination can be performed by setting a diffractive optical element (not shown) having appropriate characteristics in the illumination optical path. As a switching method of the diffractive optical element 3, for example, a known turret method or slide method can be used.

 以下の説明では、第1実施形態の作用効果の理解を容易にするために、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍の照明瞳には、図2に示すような4つの円弧状の実質的な面光源(以下、単に「面光源」という)20a,20b,20cおよび20dからなる4極状の瞳強度分布(二次光源)20が形成されるものとする。また、補正ユニット9は、4極状の瞳強度分布20の形成面よりも後側(マスク側)に配置されているものとする。また、以下の説明において単に「照明瞳」という場合には、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍の照明瞳を指すものとする。 In the following description, in order to facilitate understanding of the operational effects of the first embodiment, the illumination pupil in the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or in the vicinity thereof has four arc shapes as shown in FIG. It is assumed that a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution (secondary light source) 20 composed of a substantial surface light source (hereinafter simply referred to as “surface light source”) 20a, 20b, 20c and 20d is formed. Further, it is assumed that the correction unit 9 is arranged on the rear side (mask side) from the formation surface of the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 20. Further, in the following description, the term “illumination pupil” simply refers to the illumination pupil in the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or in the vicinity thereof.

 図2を参照すると、照明瞳に形成される4極状の瞳強度分布20は、光軸AXを挟んでX方向に間隔を隔てた一対の面光源20aおよび20bと、光軸AXを挟んでY方向に間隔を隔てた一対の円弧状の実質的な面光源20cおよび20dとを有する。なお、照明瞳におけるX方向はマイクロフライアイレンズ8の矩形状の微小レンズの短辺方向(矩形状の単位波面分割面の短辺方向)であって、ウェハWの走査方向に対応している。また、照明瞳におけるY方向は、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の矩形状の微小レンズの長辺方向(単位波面分割面の長辺方向)であって、ウェハWの走査方向と直交する走査直交方向(ウェハW上におけるY方向)に対応している。 Referring to FIG. 2, a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 20 formed on the illumination pupil has a pair of surface light sources 20a and 20b spaced apart in the X direction across the optical axis AX, and the optical axis AX. A pair of arc-shaped substantial surface light sources 20c and 20d spaced apart in the Y direction. The X direction in the illumination pupil is the short side direction of the rectangular microlens of the micro fly's eye lens 8 (the short side direction of the rectangular unit wavefront dividing surface) and corresponds to the scanning direction of the wafer W. . Further, the Y direction in the illumination pupil is the long side direction of the rectangular microlens of the micro fly's eye lens 8 (the long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface), and the scanning orthogonal direction (perpendicular to the scanning direction of the wafer W) Corresponding to the Y direction on the wafer W).

 ウェハW上には、図3に示すように、Y方向に沿って長辺を有し且つX方向に沿って短辺を有する矩形状の静止露光領域ERが形成され、この静止露光領域ERに対応するように、マスクM上には矩形状の照明領域(不図示)が形成される。ここで、静止露光領域ER内の1点に入射する光が照明瞳に形成する4極状の瞳強度分布は、入射点の位置に依存することなく、互いにほぼ同じ形状を有する。しかしながら、4極状の瞳強度分布を構成する各面光源の光強度は、入射点の位置に依存して異なる傾向がある。 On the wafer W, as shown in FIG. 3, a rectangular still exposure region ER having a long side along the Y direction and a short side along the X direction is formed. Correspondingly, a rectangular illumination area (not shown) is formed on the mask M. Here, the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil by light incident on one point in the still exposure region ER has substantially the same shape without depending on the position of the incident point. However, the light intensity of each surface light source constituting the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution tends to differ depending on the position of the incident point.

 具体的には、図4に示すように、静止露光領域ER内の中心点P1に入射する光が形成する4極状の瞳強度分布21の場合、Y方向に間隔を隔てた面光源21cおよび21dの光強度の方が、X方向に間隔を隔てた面光源21aおよび21bの光強度よりも大きくなる傾向がある。一方、図5に示すように、静止露光領域ER内の中心点P1からY方向に間隔を隔てた周辺の点P2,P3に入射する光が形成する4極状の瞳強度分布22の場合、Y方向に間隔を隔てた面光源22cおよび22dの光強度の方が、X方向に間隔を隔てた面光源22aおよび22bの光強度よりも小さくなる傾向がある。 Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, in the case of a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 21 formed by light incident on the center point P <b> 1 in the still exposure region ER, the surface light sources 21 c spaced apart in the Y direction and The light intensity of 21d tends to be higher than the light intensity of the surface light sources 21a and 21b spaced apart in the X direction. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, in the case of a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 22 formed by light incident on peripheral points P2 and P3 spaced from the central point P1 in the still exposure region ER in the Y direction, The light intensities of the surface light sources 22c and 22d spaced in the Y direction tend to be smaller than the light intensities of the surface light sources 22a and 22b spaced in the X direction.

 一般に、照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布の外形形状にかかわらず、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の中心点P1に関する瞳強度分布(中心点P1に入射する光が照明瞳に形成する瞳強度分布)のY方向(走査直交方向)に沿った光強度分布は、図6(a)に示すように、中央において最も小さく周辺に向かって増大する凹曲線状の分布を有する。一方、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の周辺点P2,P3に関する瞳強度分布のY方向に沿った光強度分布は、図6(b)に示すように、中央において最も大きく周辺に向かって減少する凸曲線状の分布を有する。 In general, regardless of the outer shape of the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil, the pupil intensity distribution related to the center point P1 in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W (the pupil formed on the illumination pupil by the light incident on the center point P1). As shown in FIG. 6A, the light intensity distribution along the Y direction (intensity distribution) of the intensity distribution has a concave curve distribution that is smallest at the center and increases toward the periphery. On the other hand, the light intensity distribution along the Y direction of the pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W is the largest at the center and toward the periphery as shown in FIG. It has a decreasing convex curve distribution.

 そして、瞳強度分布のY方向に沿った光強度分布は、静止露光領域ER内のX方向(走査方向)に沿った入射点の位置にはあまり依存しないが、静止露光領域ER内のY方向(走査直交方向)に沿った入射点の位置に依存して変化する傾向がある。このように、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の各点に関する瞳強度分布(各点に入射する光が照明瞳に形成する瞳強度分布)がそれぞれほぼ均一でない場合、ウェハW上の位置毎にパターンの線幅がばらついて、マスクMの微細パターンを露光領域の全体に亘って所望の線幅でウェハW上に忠実に転写することができない。 The light intensity distribution along the Y direction of the pupil intensity distribution does not depend much on the position of the incident point along the X direction (scanning direction) in the still exposure region ER, but the Y direction in the still exposure region ER. There is a tendency to change depending on the position of the incident point along the (scanning orthogonal direction). As described above, when the pupil intensity distribution (pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil by the light incident on each point) on each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W is not substantially uniform, for each position on the wafer W. Further, the line width of the pattern varies, and the fine pattern of the mask M cannot be faithfully transferred onto the wafer W with a desired line width over the entire exposure region.

 第1実施形態では、上述したように、アフォーカルレンズ4の瞳位置またはその近傍に、光の入射位置に応じて透過率の異なる透過率分布を有する濃度フィルター5が配置されている。また、アフォーカルレンズ4の瞳位置は、その後側レンズ群4bとズームレンズ7とにより、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の入射面と光学的に共役である。したがって、濃度フィルター5の作用により、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の入射面に形成される光強度分布が調整(補正)され、ひいてはマイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍の照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布も調整される。 In the first embodiment, as described above, the density filter 5 having a transmittance distribution with different transmittance according to the incident position of light is disposed at or near the pupil position of the afocal lens 4. The pupil position of the afocal lens 4 is optically conjugate with the incident surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 by the rear lens group 4b and the zoom lens 7. Therefore, the light intensity distribution formed on the entrance surface of the micro fly's eye lens 8 is adjusted (corrected) by the action of the density filter 5 and, as a result, formed on the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or the illumination pupil near it. The pupil intensity distribution to be adjusted is also adjusted.

 ただし、濃度フィルター5は、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の各点に関する瞳強度分布を、各点の位置に依存することなく一律に調整する。その結果、濃度フィルター5の作用により、例えば中心点P1に関する4極状の瞳強度分布21がほぼ均一になるように、ひいては各面光源21a~21dの光強度が互いにほぼ等しくなるように調整することはできるが、その場合には周辺点P2、P3に関する4極状の瞳強度分布22の面光源22a,22bと面光源22c,22dとの光強度の差は却って大きくなってしまう。 However, the density filter 5 uniformly adjusts the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W without depending on the position of each point. As a result, by the action of the density filter 5, for example, adjustment is made so that the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 21 with respect to the center point P1 becomes substantially uniform, so that the light intensities of the surface light sources 21a to 21d become substantially equal to each other. In this case, however, the difference in light intensity between the surface light sources 22a and 22b and the surface light sources 22c and 22d in the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 22 with respect to the peripheral points P2 and P3 becomes larger.

 すなわち、濃度フィルター5の作用により、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の各点に関する瞳強度分布をそれぞれほぼ均一に調整するには、濃度フィルター5とは別の手段により、各点に関する瞳強度分布を互いに同じ性状の分布に調整する必要がある。具体的には、例えば中心点P1に関する瞳強度分布21および周辺点P2,P3に関する瞳強度分布22において、面光源21a,21bと面光源21c,21dとの光強度の大小関係と面光源22a,22bと面光源22c,22dとの光強度の大小関係とをほぼ同じ比率で一致させる必要がある。 That is, in order to adjust the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W almost uniformly by the action of the density filter 5, the pupil intensity for each point can be adjusted by means other than the density filter 5. It is necessary to adjust the distribution to distributions having the same properties. Specifically, for example, in the pupil intensity distribution 21 related to the center point P1 and the pupil intensity distribution 22 related to the peripheral points P2 and P3, the magnitude relationship between the light intensities of the surface light sources 21a and 21b and the surface light sources 21c and 21d and the surface light sources 22a and 22a. It is necessary to match the magnitude relationship of the light intensity between 22b and the surface light sources 22c and 22d at substantially the same ratio.

 第1実施形態では、中心点P1に関する瞳強度分布の性状と周辺点P2,P3に関する瞳強度分布の性状とをほぼ一致させるために、周辺点P2,P3に関する瞳強度分布22において面光源22a,22bの光強度の方が面光源22c,22dの光強度よりも小さくなるように調整するための調整手段として補正ユニット9を備えている。補正ユニット9は、図7および図8に示すように、光軸AX(Z方向に対応)に沿って所定の厚さを有する一対の光透過性の基板91および92を備えている。各基板91,92は、例えば石英または蛍石のような光学材料により形成された平行平面板の形態を有する。 In the first embodiment, in order to substantially match the properties of the pupil intensity distribution related to the center point P1 and the properties of the pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral points P2 and P3, the surface light sources 22a, A correction unit 9 is provided as an adjusting means for adjusting the light intensity of 22b to be smaller than the light intensity of the surface light sources 22c and 22d. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the correction unit 9 includes a pair of light transmissive substrates 91 and 92 having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis AX (corresponding to the Z direction). Each of the substrates 91 and 92 has a form of a plane parallel plate formed of an optical material such as quartz or fluorite.

 第1基板91は、例えば光軸AXを中心とする円形状の外形形状を有し、その入射面91aが光軸AXと直交するような姿勢で固定的に位置決めされている。第2基板92は、第1基板91の後側(マスク側)に配置されて、例えば光軸AXを中心とする円形状の外形形状を有する。また、第2基板92は、その入射面92aが光軸AXと直交する姿勢を維持しつつ、光軸AX方向(Z方向)に移動可能に構成されている。補正ユニット9では、駆動制御系99からの指令に基づき、第2基板92が光軸AX方向に移動する。なお、第2基板92を固定的に位置決めし且つ第1基板91を光軸AX方向に移動可能に構成したり、基板91および92の双方を光軸AX方向に移動可能に構成したりすることもできる。 The first substrate 91 has, for example, a circular outer shape centered on the optical axis AX, and is fixedly positioned in such a posture that its incident surface 91a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX. The second substrate 92 is disposed on the rear side (mask side) of the first substrate 91 and has, for example, a circular outer shape centered on the optical axis AX. Further, the second substrate 92 is configured to be movable in the optical axis AX direction (Z direction) while maintaining the posture in which the incident surface 92a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX. In the correction unit 9, the second substrate 92 moves in the optical axis AX direction based on a command from the drive control system 99. The second substrate 92 is fixedly positioned and the first substrate 91 is configured to be movable in the optical axis AX direction, or both the substrates 91 and 92 are configured to be movable in the optical axis AX direction. You can also.

 図9を参照すると、基板91の射出面91bおよび基板92の入射面92aには、互いに同じ外形形状および同じ大きさを有する遮光性ドット51a,51bおよび52a,52bが、所定の分布にしたがって形成されている。ここで、単位減光領域としての各遮光性ドット51a,51b,52a,52bは、例えばクロムや酸化クロム等からなる。また、遮光性ドット52aは遮光性ドット51aに一対一対応するように分布形成され、遮光性ドット52bは遮光性ドット51bに一対一対応するように分布形成されている。 Referring to FIG. 9, light-shielding dots 51a, 51b and 52a, 52b having the same outer shape and the same size are formed on the exit surface 91b of the substrate 91 and the incident surface 92a of the substrate 92 according to a predetermined distribution. Has been. Here, each light-shielding dot 51a, 51b, 52a, 52b as a unit dimming region is made of, for example, chromium or chromium oxide. The light shielding dots 52a are distributed so as to correspond to the light shielding dots 51a on a one-to-one basis, and the light shielding dots 52b are distributed so as to correspond to the light shielding dots 51b on a one-on-one basis.

 ここで、一群の遮光性ドット51aおよび一群の遮光性ドット52aは面光源20aからの光に作用するように配置され、一群の遮光性ドット51bおよび一群の遮光性ドット52bは面光源20bからの光に作用するように配置されている。図9では、図面の明瞭化のために、基板91の射出面91bに形成された一対の遮光性ドット51aおよび51b、並びに基板92の入射面92aに形成された一対の遮光性ドット52aおよび52bだけを示している。 Here, the group of light shielding dots 51a and the group of light shielding dots 52a are arranged so as to act on the light from the surface light source 20a, and the group of light shielding dots 51b and the group of light shielding dots 52b are from the surface light source 20b. It arrange | positions so that it may act on light. In FIG. 9, for the sake of clarity, the pair of light shielding dots 51 a and 51 b formed on the exit surface 91 b of the substrate 91 and the pair of light shielding dots 52 a and 52 b formed on the incident surface 92 a of the substrate 92. Only shows.

 以下、説明の理解を容易にするために、各遮光性ドット51a,51b,52a,52bは円形状の外形形状を有し、遮光性ドット51aと52aとが光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合い、遮光性ドット51bと52bとが光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合っているものとする。また、説明の理解を容易にするために、基板91の一対の遮光性ドット51aおよび51b、並びに基板92の一対の遮光性ドット52aおよび52bだけに着目して、補正ユニット9の作用を説明する。 Hereinafter, in order to facilitate understanding of the description, each of the light shielding dots 51a, 51b, 52a, 52b has a circular outer shape, and the light shielding dots 51a and 52a overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction. It is assumed that the light shielding dots 51b and 52b overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction. In order to facilitate understanding of the description, the operation of the correction unit 9 will be described by focusing on only the pair of light shielding dots 51a and 51b on the substrate 91 and the pair of light shielding dots 52a and 52b on the substrate 92. .

 第2基板92の光軸AX方向に沿った基準状態(基準位置)において、円形状の遮光性ドット51aと52aとの組み合わせからなる組み合わせ減光領域に対して光軸AXに平行な光が入射すると、補正ユニット9の直後であって射出面92bに平行な面において、図10(a)の左側に示すように、円形状の遮光性ドット51aにより減光された領域51aaと、円形状の遮光性ドット52aにより減光された領域52aaとは互いに重なり合う。すなわち、補正ユニット9の直後において、円形状の減光領域51aaと52aaとは、円形状の減光領域51aaの1個分の面積を有する減光領域を形成する。 In a reference state (reference position) along the optical axis AX direction of the second substrate 92, light that is parallel to the optical axis AX is incident on a combined light-reducing region that is a combination of circular light-shielding dots 51a and 52a. Then, on the surface immediately after the correction unit 9 and parallel to the exit surface 92b, as shown on the left side of FIG. 10 (a), the region 51aa attenuated by the circular light-shielding dot 51a and the circular shape The regions 52aa dimmed by the light shielding dots 52a overlap each other. That is, immediately after the correction unit 9, the circular dimming areas 51aa and 52aa form a dimming area having an area equivalent to one circular dimming area 51aa.

 補正ユニット9に光軸AXに平行な光が入射する場合、第2基板92が基準状態から+Z方向に移動して基板91と92との光軸AX方向の間隔、ひいては遮光性ドット51aと52aとの光軸AX方向の間隔が大きくなっても、図10(a)の右側に示すように、減光領域51aaと52aaとは重なり合ったまま変化しない。同様に、光軸AXに平行な光が入射する場合、第2基板92が基準状態から-Z方向に移動して遮光性ドット51aと52aとの間隔が小さくなっても、図示を省略したが、減光領域51aaと52aaとは重なり合ったまま変化しない。 When light parallel to the optical axis AX is incident on the correction unit 9, the second substrate 92 moves in the + Z direction from the reference state, and the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 in the optical axis AX direction, and thus the light shielding dots 51a and 52a. Even if the distance in the optical axis AX direction increases, the dimming regions 51aa and 52aa do not change while overlapping as shown on the right side of FIG. Similarly, when light parallel to the optical axis AX is incident, the illustration is omitted even when the second substrate 92 moves in the −Z direction from the reference state and the distance between the light shielding dots 51a and 52a becomes small. The dimming areas 51aa and 52aa do not change while overlapping.

 第2基板92の光軸AX方向に沿った基準状態において、円形状の遮光性ドット51aと52aとの組み合わせからなる組み合わせ減光領域に入射する光の光軸AXに対する角度が例えばYZ平面に沿って0度から単調に増大すると、補正ユニット9の直後において、図10(b)の左側に示すように、減光領域51aaおよび52aaが互いに異なる距離だけZ方向に移動し、減光領域51aaと52aaとの重なり合う領域が単調に減少する。その結果、図10(b)の左側に示す状態では、円形状の減光領域51aaと52aaとが、その重なり合う領域の面積に応じて、円形状の減光領域51aaの1個分の面積よりも大きく且つ2個分の面積よりも小さい面積を有する減光領域を形成する。 In the reference state along the optical axis AX direction of the second substrate 92, the angle of the light incident on the combined dimming region composed of the combination of the circular light shielding dots 51a and 52a with respect to the optical axis AX is, for example, along the YZ plane. As shown on the left side of FIG. 10 (b), the dimming areas 51aa and 52aa move in the Z direction by different distances immediately after the correction unit 9, and the dimming areas 51aa and The overlapping area with 52aa monotonously decreases. As a result, in the state shown on the left side of FIG. 10B, the circular dimming regions 51aa and 52aa are larger than the area of one circular dimming region 51aa according to the area of the overlapping region. And a dimming region having an area smaller than the area of two.

 図10(b)の左側に示す状態から、第2基板92が+Z方向に移動して遮光性ドット51aと52aとの間隔が単調に増大すると、図10(b)の右側に示すように、減光領域51aaと52aaとの重なり合う領域が単調に減少し、減光領域51aaと52aaとが形成する減光領域の面積は単調に増大する。また、図10(b)の左側に示す状態から、第2基板92が-Z方向に移動して遮光性ドット51aと52aとの間隔が単調に減少すると、図示を省略したが、減光領域51aaと52aaとの重なり合う領域が単調に増大し、減光領域51aaと52aaとが形成する減光領域の面積は単調に減少する。 When the second substrate 92 moves in the + Z direction from the state shown on the left side of FIG. 10B and the distance between the light shielding dots 51a and 52a monotonously increases, as shown on the right side of FIG. 10B, The overlapping area between the dimming areas 51aa and 52aa monotonously decreases, and the area of the dimming area formed by the dimming areas 51aa and 52aa monotonously increases. Also, from the state shown on the left side of FIG. 10B, when the second substrate 92 moves in the −Z direction and the distance between the light shielding dots 51a and 52a monotonously decreases, the illustration is omitted. The overlapping area of 51aa and 52aa increases monotonously, and the area of the dimming area formed by the dimming areas 51aa and 52aa monotonously decreases.

 こうして、補正ユニット9では、基板91と92との光軸AX方向の間隔が一定であるとき、円形状の遮光性ドット51aと52aとからなる組み合わせ減光領域は、第1基板91に対する光の入射角度が大きくなるにつれて減光率が増大する減光作用を発揮する。このことは、図11(a)の左側の図と図11(b)の左側の図との比較、および図11(a)の右側の図と図11(b)の右側の図との比較により明らかである。同様に、基板91と92との光軸AX方向の間隔が一定であるとき、円形状の遮光性ドット51bと52bとからなる組み合わせ減光領域も、第1基板91に対する光の入射角度が大きくなるにつれて減光率が増大する減光作用を発揮する。 Thus, in the correction unit 9, when the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 in the optical axis AX direction is constant, the combined dimming region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51 a and 52 a is used to transmit light to the first substrate 91. It exhibits a dimming effect in which the dimming rate increases as the incident angle increases. This is because the left side of FIG. 11 (a) is compared with the left side of FIG. 11 (b), and the right side of FIG. 11 (a) is compared with the right side of FIG. 11 (b). Is clearer. Similarly, when the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 in the optical axis AX direction is constant, the light attenuation angle of the combined light reduction region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51b and 52b is also large in the first substrate 91. As it becomes, the dimming effect of increasing the dimming rate is exhibited.

 また、補正ユニット9では、第1基板91に対する光の入射角度が0度であるとき、すなわち光軸AXに平行な光が入射するとき、円形状の遮光性ドット51aと52aとからなる組み合わせ減光領域は、基板91と92との光軸AX方向の間隔の変化にかかわらず、減光率は不変であり比較的小さい一定の減光作用を発揮する。このことは、図11(a)の左側の図と図11(a)の右側の図との比較により明らかである。同様に、光軸AXに平行な光が入射するとき、円形状の遮光性ドット51bと52bとからなる組み合わせ減光領域は、基板91と92との間隔の変化にかかわらず、比較的小さい一定の減光作用を発揮する。 Further, in the correction unit 9, when the incident angle of the light with respect to the first substrate 91 is 0 degree, that is, when the light parallel to the optical axis AX is incident, the combined reduction composed of the circular light shielding dots 51a and 52a is reduced. In the optical region, regardless of the change in the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 in the optical axis AX direction, the light attenuation rate remains unchanged and a relatively small constant light reduction effect is exhibited. This is apparent from a comparison between the left diagram in FIG. 11A and the right diagram in FIG. Similarly, when light parallel to the optical axis AX is incident, the combined dimming region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51b and 52b is relatively small and constant regardless of the change in the distance between the substrates 91 and 92. Exhibits the dimming effect.

 また、補正ユニット9では、第1基板91に対する光の入射角度が一定(入射角度が0度でない所定の値)であるとき、円形状の遮光性ドット51aと52aとからなる組み合わせ減光領域は、基板91と92との光軸AX方向の間隔が大きくなるにつれて減光率が増大する減光作用を発揮する。このことは、図11(b)の左側の図と図11(b)の右側の図との比較により明らかである。同様に、補正ユニット9では、第1基板91に対する光の入射角度が一定であるとき、円形状の遮光性ドット51bと52bとからなる組み合わせ減光領域も、基板91と92との光軸AX方向の間隔が大きくなるにつれて減光率が増大する減光作用を発揮する。 Further, in the correction unit 9, when the incident angle of light with respect to the first substrate 91 is constant (a predetermined value where the incident angle is not 0 degree), the combined dimming region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51a and 52a is As the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 in the optical axis AX direction increases, the light reduction rate increases. This is apparent from a comparison between the left side of FIG. 11B and the right side of FIG. 11B. Similarly, in the correction unit 9, when the incident angle of light with respect to the first substrate 91 is constant, the combined dimming region composed of the circular light shielding dots 51 b and 52 b is also the optical axis AX of the substrates 91 and 92. It exhibits a dimming effect in which the dimming rate increases as the direction spacing increases.

 第1実施形態では、第1基板91と第2基板92とが光軸AX方向に沿って相対移動可能に構成されている。また、補正ユニット9は、4極状の瞳強度分布20のうち、光軸AXを挟んでX方向(単位波面分割面の短辺方向)に間隔を隔てた一対の面光源20aおよび20bからの光に作用し、光軸AXを挟んでY方向(単位波面分割面の長辺方向)に間隔を隔てた一対の面光源20cおよび20dからの光には作用しないように構成されている。 In the first embodiment, the first substrate 91 and the second substrate 92 are configured to be relatively movable along the optical axis AX direction. In addition, the correction unit 9 includes a pair of surface light sources 20a and 20b spaced apart in the X direction (the short side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface) across the optical axis AX in the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 20. It is configured to act on light and not to light from a pair of surface light sources 20c and 20d spaced apart in the Y direction (long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface) across the optical axis AX.

 ここで、図12を参照すると、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の中心点P1に達する光、すなわちマスクブラインド11の開口部の中心点P1’に達する光は、補正ユニット9に対して(すなわち第1基板91に対して)入射角度0で入射する。換言すれば、中心点P1に関する瞳強度分布21の面光源21aおよび21bからの光は、入射角度0で第1基板91に入射する。 Referring now to FIG. 12, the light reaching the center point P1 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W, that is, the light reaching the center point P1 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 is directed to the correction unit 9 ( That is, it is incident on the first substrate 91 at an incident angle of zero. In other words, the light from the surface light sources 21a and 21b of the pupil intensity distribution 21 with respect to the center point P1 enters the first substrate 91 at an incident angle of 0.

 一方、図13に示すように、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の周辺点P2,P3に達する光、すなわちマスクブラインド11の開口部の周辺点P2’,P3’に達する光は、補正ユニット9に対して比較的大きい入射角度±θで入射する。換言すれば、周辺点P2,P3に関する瞳強度分布22の面光源22aおよび22bからの光は、比較的大きい入射角度±θで第1基板91に入射する。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, the light reaching the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W, that is, the light reaching the peripheral points P2 ′ and P3 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 9 is incident at a relatively large incident angle ± θ. In other words, the light from the surface light sources 22a and 22b of the pupil intensity distribution 22 related to the peripheral points P2 and P3 is incident on the first substrate 91 at a relatively large incident angle ± θ.

 なお、図12および図13において、参照符号B1は面光源20a(21a,22a)のX方向に沿った最外縁の点を示し、参照符号B2は面光源20b(21b,22b)のX方向に沿った最外縁の点を示している。また、図12および図13に関連する説明の理解を容易するために、面光源20c(21c,22c)のZ方向に沿った最外縁の点(図2などを参照)を参照符号B3で示し、面光源20d(21d,22d)のZ方向に沿った最外縁の点(図2などを参照)を参照符号B4で示している。ただし、上述したように、面光源20c(21c,22c)および面光源20d(21d,22d)からの光は、補正ユニット9の作用を受けない。 12 and 13, reference numeral B1 indicates the outermost point along the X direction of the surface light source 20a (21a, 22a), and reference numeral B2 indicates the X direction of the surface light source 20b (21b, 22b). The point of the outermost edge along is shown. In order to facilitate understanding of the explanation related to FIGS. 12 and 13, the outermost point (see FIG. 2 and the like) along the Z direction of the surface light source 20c (21c, 22c) is indicated by reference numeral B3. The point on the outermost edge along the Z direction of the surface light source 20d (21d, 22d) (see FIG. 2 and the like) is indicated by reference numeral B4. However, as described above, the light from the surface light source 20c (21c, 22c) and the surface light source 20d (21d, 22d) is not affected by the correction unit 9.

 こうして、中心点P1に関する瞳強度分布21のうち、面光源21aおよび21bからの光は、補正ユニット9の減光作用を受けるものの、その光強度の低下は比較的小さい。面光源21cおよび21dからの光は、補正ユニット9の減光作用を受けないため、その光強度は変化しない。その結果、中心点P1に関する瞳強度分布21は、図14に示すように、補正ユニット9の減光作用を受けても、元の分布21とほぼ同じ性状の瞳強度分布21’に調整されるだけである。すなわち、補正ユニット9により調整された瞳強度分布21’においても、Y方向に間隔を隔てた面光源21c,21dの光強度の方がX方向に間隔を隔てた面光源21a’,21b’の光強度よりも大きい性状は維持される。 Thus, in the pupil intensity distribution 21 related to the center point P1, the light from the surface light sources 21a and 21b is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 9, but the decrease in the light intensity is relatively small. Since the light from the surface light sources 21c and 21d does not receive the dimming action of the correction unit 9, the light intensity does not change. As a result, as shown in FIG. 14, the pupil intensity distribution 21 related to the center point P1 is adjusted to a pupil intensity distribution 21 ′ having substantially the same properties as the original distribution 21 even if the correction unit 9 receives the dimming action. Only. That is, also in the pupil intensity distribution 21 ′ adjusted by the correction unit 9, the light intensity of the surface light sources 21 c and 21 d spaced apart in the Y direction is higher than that of the surface light sources 21 a ′ and 21 b ′ spaced in the X direction. Properties greater than light intensity are maintained.

 一方、周辺点P2、P3に関する瞳強度分布22のうち、面光源22aおよび22bからの光は、補正ユニット9の減光作用を受けて、その光強度は比較的大きく低下する。ここで、面光源22aおよび22bからの光の強度低下の程度は、補正ユニット9における基板91と92との間隔を変化させることにより調整可能である。一方、面光源22cおよび22dからの光は、補正ユニット9の減光作用を受けないため、その光強度は変化しない。その結果、周辺点P2、P3に関する瞳強度分布22は、図15に示すように、補正ユニット9の減光作用により、元の分布22とは異なる性状の瞳強度分布22’に調整される。すなわち、補正ユニット9により調整された瞳強度分布22’では、Y方向に間隔を隔てた面光源22c,22dの光強度の方がX方向に間隔を隔てた面光源22a’,22b’の光強度よりも大きい性状に変化する。 On the other hand, in the pupil intensity distribution 22 related to the peripheral points P2 and P3, the light from the surface light sources 22a and 22b is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 9, and the light intensity is relatively reduced. Here, the degree of decrease in the intensity of light from the surface light sources 22a and 22b can be adjusted by changing the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 in the correction unit 9. On the other hand, the light from the surface light sources 22c and 22d does not receive the dimming action of the correction unit 9, and therefore the light intensity does not change. As a result, the pupil intensity distribution 22 relating to the peripheral points P2 and P3 is adjusted to a pupil intensity distribution 22 'having a different property from the original distribution 22 by the dimming action of the correction unit 9, as shown in FIG. That is, in the pupil intensity distribution 22 ′ adjusted by the correction unit 9, the light intensity of the surface light sources 22c and 22d spaced in the Y direction is greater than the light of the surface light sources 22a ′ and 22b ′ spaced in the X direction. It changes to a property larger than strength.

 こうして、補正ユニット9の減光作用により、周辺点P2、P3に関する瞳強度分布22は、中心点P1に関する瞳強度分布21’とほぼ同じ性状の分布22’に調整される。同様に、中心点P1と周辺点P2、P3との間でY方向に沿って並んだ各点に関する瞳強度分布、ひいてはウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の各点に関する瞳強度分布も、中心点P1に関する瞳強度分布21’とほぼ同じ性状の分布に調整される。換言すれば、補正ユニット9の減光作用により、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の各点に関する瞳強度分布は互いにほぼ同じ性状の分布に調整される。さらに別の表現をすれば、補正ユニット9は、各点に関する瞳強度分布を互いにほぼ同じ性状の分布に調整するために必要な所要の減光率特性を有する。 Thus, due to the dimming action of the correction unit 9, the pupil intensity distribution 22 relating to the peripheral points P2 and P3 is adjusted to a distribution 22 'having substantially the same properties as the pupil intensity distribution 21' relating to the center point P1. Similarly, the pupil intensity distribution for each point arranged along the Y direction between the center point P1 and the peripheral points P2 and P3, and hence the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W is also the center. The distribution is adjusted to a distribution having substantially the same property as the pupil intensity distribution 21 ′ relating to the point P1. In other words, the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W is adjusted to a distribution having substantially the same property by the dimming action of the correction unit 9. In other words, the correction unit 9 has a necessary light attenuation rate characteristic necessary for adjusting the pupil intensity distribution for each point to a distribution having substantially the same property.

 以上のように、第1実施形態の補正ユニット9では、第1基板91の射出面91bに、第1減光パターンとして、複数の円形状の遮光性ドット51a,51bが所定の分布にしたがって形成されている。また、第2基板92の入射面には、第2減光パターンとして、複数の遮光性ドット51a,51bと一対一対応するように複数の円形状の遮光性ドット52a,52bが形成されている。円形状の遮光性ドット51aと52aとは、互いに同じ大きさを有し、光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合っている。同様に、円形状の遮光性ドット51bと52bとは、互いに同じ大きさを有し、光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合っている。 As described above, in the correction unit 9 of the first embodiment, a plurality of circular light-shielding dots 51a and 51b are formed on the emission surface 91b of the first substrate 91 as a first dimming pattern according to a predetermined distribution. Has been. A plurality of circular light-shielding dots 52a and 52b are formed on the incident surface of the second substrate 92 as a second dimming pattern so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of light-shielding dots 51a and 51b. . The circular light-shielding dots 51a and 52a have the same size and overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction. Similarly, the circular light-shielding dots 51b and 52b have the same size and overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction.

 また、第1基板91と第2基板92とは、光軸AX方向に沿って相対移動可能に構成されている。したがって、円形状の遮光性ドット51aと52aとからなる組み合わせ減光領域および円形状の遮光性ドット51bと52bとからなる組み合わせ減光領域は、いわゆる視差の効果により、光の入射角度が大きくなるにつれて減光率が単調に増大し、基板91と92との間隔が大きくなるにつれて減光率が単調に増大する減光作用を発揮する。ただし、光の入射角度が0度のときには、基板91と92との間隔の変化に依存することなく減光率は一定である。 Further, the first substrate 91 and the second substrate 92 are configured to be relatively movable along the optical axis AX direction. Therefore, the combined light-reducing region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51a and 52a and the combined light-reduced region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 51b and 52b have a large incident angle of light due to the so-called parallax effect. As the light attenuation rate increases monotonously as the distance between the substrates 91 and 92 increases, the light attenuation rate monotonously increases. However, when the incident angle of light is 0 degree, the light attenuation rate is constant without depending on the change in the distance between the substrates 91 and 92.

 このように、補正ユニット9は、第1基板91と第2基板92との間隔の変化(一般には相対位置の変化)および第1基板91への光の入射角度の変化に応じて、第1減光パターン(51a,51b)および第2減光パターン(52a,52b)による減光率が変化するように構成されている。また、補正ユニット9は、照明瞳の近傍の位置、すなわち被照射面であるマスクM(またはウェハW)における光の位置情報が光の角度情報に変換される位置に配置されている。したがって、第1実施形態の補正ユニット9の減光作用により、被照射面上の各点に関する瞳強度分布をそれぞれ独立的に調整することができ、ひいては各点に関する瞳強度分布を互いにほぼ同じ性状の分布に調整することが可能である。 As described above, the correction unit 9 can change the first substrate 91 according to the change in the distance between the first substrate 91 and the second substrate 92 (generally, the change in the relative position) and the change in the incident angle of the light to the first substrate 91. The dimming rate by the dimming pattern (51a, 51b) and the second dimming pattern (52a, 52b) is changed. Further, the correction unit 9 is disposed at a position near the illumination pupil, that is, a position where the position information of the light on the mask M (or wafer W) that is the irradiated surface is converted into the angle information of the light. Therefore, the dimming action of the correction unit 9 of the first embodiment can independently adjust the pupil intensity distribution for each point on the irradiated surface, and consequently the pupil intensity distribution for each point has substantially the same property. It is possible to adjust to the distribution of.

 また、第1実施形態の照明光学系(2~12)では、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の各点に関する瞳強度分布をそれぞれ独立的に調整する補正ユニット9と、各点に関する瞳強度分布を一律に調整する濃度フィルター5との協働作用により、各点に関する瞳強度分布をそれぞれほぼ均一に調整することができる。したがって、第1実施形態の露光装置(2~WS)では、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の各点での瞳強度分布をそれぞれほぼ均一に調整する照明光学系(2~12)を用いて、マスクMの微細パターンに応じた適切な照明条件のもとで良好な露光を行うことができ、ひいてはマスクMの微細パターンを露光領域の全体に亘って所望の線幅でウェハW上に忠実に転写することができる。 In the illumination optical system (2 to 12) of the first embodiment, the correction unit 9 that independently adjusts the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W, and the pupil intensity for each point. By the cooperative action with the density filter 5 that uniformly adjusts the distribution, the pupil intensity distribution for each point can be adjusted substantially uniformly. Therefore, in the exposure apparatus (2 to WS) of the first embodiment, the illumination optical system (2 to 12) that adjusts the pupil intensity distribution at each point in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W almost uniformly is used. Thus, good exposure can be performed under appropriate illumination conditions according to the fine pattern of the mask M, and as a result, the fine pattern of the mask M can be formed on the wafer W with a desired line width over the entire exposure region. Can be faithfully transferred.

 第1実施形態において、静止露光領域ER内の各点に関する瞳強度分布をそれぞれほぼ均一に調整する動作、さらに一般的には各点に関する瞳強度分布を所要の分布に調整する動作は、例えば投影光学系PLを介した光に基づいて投影光学系PLの瞳面における瞳強度分布を計測する瞳強度分布計測装置(不図示)の計測結果に基づいて行われる。瞳強度分布計測装置は、例えば投影光学系PLの瞳位置と光学的に共役な位置に配置された撮像面を有するCCD撮像部を備え、投影光学系PLの像面上の各点に関する瞳強度分布(各点に入射する光線が投影光学系PLの瞳面に形成する瞳強度分布)をモニターする。瞳強度分布計測装置の詳細な構成および作用については、米国特許公開第2008/0030707号公報などを参照することができる。 In the first embodiment, an operation for adjusting the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER substantially uniformly, and more generally an operation for adjusting the pupil intensity distribution for each point to a required distribution is, for example, a projection. This is performed based on the measurement result of a pupil intensity distribution measuring device (not shown) that measures the pupil intensity distribution on the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL based on light via the optical system PL. The pupil intensity distribution measuring apparatus includes, for example, a CCD imaging unit having an imaging surface disposed at a position optically conjugate with the pupil position of the projection optical system PL, and the pupil intensity relating to each point on the image plane of the projection optical system PL. The distribution (pupil intensity distribution formed on the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL by the light incident on each point) is monitored. For the detailed configuration and operation of the pupil intensity distribution measuring apparatus, reference can be made to US Patent Publication No. 2008/0030707.

 具体的に、瞳強度分布計測装置の計測結果は、制御部(不図示)に供給される。制御部は、瞳強度分布計測装置の計測結果に基づいて、投影光学系PLの瞳面における瞳強度分布が所望の分布になるように、補正ユニット9の駆動制御系99に指令を出力する。駆動制御系99は、制御部からの指令に基づいて第2基板92のZ方向位置を制御し、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の各点に関する瞳強度分布を所要の分布に調整する。 Specifically, the measurement result of the pupil intensity distribution measuring device is supplied to a control unit (not shown). The control unit outputs a command to the drive control system 99 of the correction unit 9 so that the pupil intensity distribution on the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL becomes a desired distribution based on the measurement result of the pupil intensity distribution measuring device. The drive control system 99 controls the position of the second substrate 92 in the Z direction based on a command from the control unit, and adjusts the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W to a required distribution.

 第1実施形態において、ウェハ(被照射面)W上の光量分布が、例えば補正ユニット9の減光作用(調整作用)の影響を受けることが考えられる。この場合、必要に応じて、公知の構成を有する光量分布調整部の作用により、静止露光領域ER内の照度分布または静止露光領域(照明領域)ERの形状を変更することができる。具体的に、照度分布を変更する光量分布調整部としては、特開2001-313250号および特開2002-100561号(並びにそれらに対応する米国特許第6771350号および第6927836号)に記載された構成および手法を用いることができる。また、照明領域の形状を変更する光量分布調整部としては、国際特許公開第WO2005/048326号パンフレット(およびそれに対応する米国特許公開第2007/0014112号公報)に記載された構成および手法を用いることができる。 In the first embodiment, it is conceivable that the light amount distribution on the wafer (irradiated surface) W is affected by, for example, the dimming action (adjusting action) of the correction unit 9. In this case, the illuminance distribution in the still exposure region ER or the shape of the still exposure region (illumination region) ER can be changed as necessary by the action of the light quantity distribution adjusting unit having a known configuration. Specifically, as the light quantity distribution adjusting unit for changing the illuminance distribution, configurations described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2001-313250 and 2002-1000056 (and US Pat. Nos. 6,771,350 and 6927836 corresponding thereto). And techniques can be used. Further, as the light amount distribution adjusting unit for changing the shape of the illumination area, the configuration and method described in the pamphlet of International Patent Publication No. WO2005 / 048326 (and the corresponding US Patent Publication No. 2007/0014112) are used. Can do.

 なお、上述の第1実施形態では、図7~図9に示す特定の形態にしたがって、光軸AXに対して垂直に配置された平行平面板の形態を有する一対の基板91および92により補正ユニット9を構成している。そして、第1基板91の射出面91bには第1減光パターンとしての円形状の遮光性ドット51a,51bが分布形成され、第2基板92の入射面92aには第2減光パターンとしての円形状の遮光性ドット52a,52bが分布形成されている。しかしながら、これに限定されることなく、補正ユニット9の具体的な構成については、様々な形態が可能である。 In the above-described first embodiment, the correction unit includes a pair of substrates 91 and 92 having the form of a plane-parallel plate arranged perpendicular to the optical axis AX according to the specific form shown in FIGS. 9 is constituted. Then, circular light-shielding dots 51a and 51b as first dimming patterns are distributed and formed on the emission surface 91b of the first substrate 91, and the second dimming pattern is formed on the incident surface 92a of the second substrate 92. Circular light-shielding dots 52a and 52b are distributed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various configurations are possible for the specific configuration of the correction unit 9.

 例えば、補正ユニット9を構成する基板の形態(外形形状など)、基板の姿勢、各減光パターンを形成する単位減光領域の数、単位減光領域の形状、単位減光領域の形成面の位置(入射面または射出面)、単位減光領域の分布の形態、補正ユニット9の配置位置などについて、様々な形態が可能である。具体的に、上述の第1実施形態では、光透過性の基板91,92として、例えば少なくとも一方の面が曲率を有するような基板を用いることができる。 For example, the form of the substrate constituting the correction unit 9 (outer shape, etc.), the posture of the substrate, the number of unit dimming areas forming each dimming pattern, the shape of the unit dimming area, the formation surface of the unit dimming area Various forms are possible with respect to the position (incident surface or exit surface), the distribution form of the unit dimming region, the arrangement position of the correction unit 9, and the like. Specifically, in the first embodiment described above, as the light transmissive substrates 91 and 92, for example, a substrate having at least one surface having a curvature can be used.

 また、上述の第1実施形態では、一対の基板91と92とが光軸AX方向に沿って相対的に移動可能に構成されている。しかしながら、これに限定されることなく、光軸AX廻りに相対的に回転可能な一対の基板により、上述の第1実施形態にかかる補正ユニット9と同様の作用を奏する補正ユニットを構成することもできる。図16を参照すると、上述の第1実施形態の変形例にかかる補正ユニット9Aは、光軸AXに沿って所定の厚さを有する一対の光透過性の基板93および94を備えている。各基板93,94は、例えば石英または蛍石のような光学材料により形成された平行平面板の形態を有する。 Further, in the first embodiment described above, the pair of substrates 91 and 92 are configured to be relatively movable along the optical axis AX direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a correction unit that exhibits the same operation as the correction unit 9 according to the first embodiment described above may be configured by a pair of substrates that can be relatively rotated around the optical axis AX. it can. Referring to FIG. 16, the correction unit 9A according to the modified example of the first embodiment includes a pair of light transmissive substrates 93 and 94 having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis AX. Each of the substrates 93 and 94 is in the form of a plane parallel plate formed of an optical material such as quartz or fluorite.

 第1基板93は、例えば光軸AXを中心とする円形状の外形形状を有し、その入射面93aが光軸AXと直交するような姿勢を維持しつつ、光軸AX廻りに回転可能に構成されている。第2基板94は、第1基板93の後側に配置されて、例えば光軸AXを中心とする円形状の外形形状を有する。また、第2基板94は、その入射面94aが光軸AXと直交する姿勢を維持しつつ、光軸AX廻りに回転可能に構成されている。補正ユニット9Aでは、駆動制御系99Aからの指令に基づき、第1基板93および第2基板94が光軸AX廻りに回転する。 The first substrate 93 has, for example, a circular outer shape centered on the optical axis AX, and can rotate around the optical axis AX while maintaining a posture in which the incident surface 93a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX. It is configured. The second substrate 94 is disposed on the rear side of the first substrate 93 and has, for example, a circular outer shape centered on the optical axis AX. Further, the second substrate 94 is configured to be rotatable around the optical axis AX while maintaining a posture in which the incident surface 94a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX. In the correction unit 9A, the first substrate 93 and the second substrate 94 rotate around the optical axis AX based on a command from the drive control system 99A.

 基板93の射出面93bには、図17(a)に示すように、光軸AXを中心とした円の周方向に沿って配列された複数の遮光性の線状領域53aおよび複数の遮光性の線状領域53bが形成されている。また、基板94の入射面94aには、図17(b)に示すように、光軸AXを中心とした円の周方向に沿って配列された複数の遮光性の線状領域54aおよび複数の遮光性の線状領域54bが形成されている。なお、図17(a)では、説明の理解を容易にするために、基板93の入射面93a側から光軸AX方向に見た射出面93bの様子を示している。単位減光領域としての各線状領域53a,53b,54a,54bは、例えばクロムや酸化クロム等からなる。また、線状領域54aは線状領域53aに一対一対応するように分布形成され、線状領域54bは線状領域53bに一対一対応するように分布形成されている。 On the exit surface 93b of the substrate 93, as shown in FIG. 17A, a plurality of light-shielding linear regions 53a and a plurality of light-shielding properties arranged along the circumferential direction of a circle centered on the optical axis AX. The linear region 53b is formed. Further, on the incident surface 94a of the substrate 94, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), a plurality of light-shielding linear regions 54a and a plurality of light-shielding linear regions 54a arranged along the circumferential direction of a circle centered on the optical axis AX. A light-shielding linear region 54b is formed. In FIG. 17A, in order to facilitate understanding of the description, the appearance of the exit surface 93b viewed from the incident surface 93a side of the substrate 93 in the optical axis AX direction is shown. Each linear region 53a, 53b, 54a, 54b as a unit dimming region is made of, for example, chromium or chromium oxide. Further, the linear regions 54a are distributed so as to correspond one-to-one with the linear regions 53a, and the linear regions 54b are distributed so as to correspond one-to-one with the linear regions 53b.

 以下、説明の理解を容易にするために、線状領域53a,53b,54a,54bは、互いに同じ形状および大きさを有し、光軸AXを中心とした円の周方向に沿って等角度配列され且つ光軸AXから間隔を隔てて放射状に延びているものとする。また、第1基板93の基準回転位置において、一群の線状領域53aは+X軸と+Y軸との間の90度の角度範囲にあり、一群の線状領域53bは-X軸と-Y軸との間の角度範囲にあるものとする。一方、第2基板94の基準回転位置において、一群の線状領域54aは+X軸と-Y軸との間の角度範囲にあり、一群の線状領域54bは-X軸と+Y軸との間の角度範囲にあるものとする。 Hereinafter, in order to facilitate understanding of the description, the linear regions 53a, 53b, 54a, 54b have the same shape and size as each other, and are equiangular along the circumferential direction of a circle centered on the optical axis AX. It is assumed that they are arranged and extend radially from the optical axis AX at intervals. Further, at the reference rotation position of the first substrate 93, the group of linear regions 53a are in an angle range of 90 degrees between the + X axis and the + Y axis, and the group of linear regions 53b are -X axis and -Y axis. In the range of angles between. On the other hand, at the reference rotation position of the second substrate 94, the group of linear regions 54a is in an angle range between the + X axis and the −Y axis, and the group of linear regions 54b is between the −X axis and the + Y axis. It is assumed that it is in the angle range.

 基板93および94の基準状態(基準回転位置)において、一群の線状領域53a,53b,54a,54bは、図18に示すように、光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合うことなく且つ周方向に沿って間隔を隔てている。したがって、面光源20a~20dからの光は、補正ユニット9A(ひいては基板93)への入射角度に依存することなく、線状領域53a,53b,54a,54bにより一律に減光作用を受ける。換言すれば、基板93および94の基準状態では、いわゆる視差の効果が発揮されることなく、線状領域53a,53b,54a,54bによる減光作用は一定である。 In the reference state (reference rotation position) of the substrates 93 and 94, as shown in FIG. 18, the group of linear regions 53a, 53b, 54a, 54b are not overlapped with each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction and in the circumferential direction. Is spaced along. Therefore, the light from the surface light sources 20a to 20d is uniformly reduced by the linear regions 53a, 53b, 54a, and 54b without depending on the incident angle to the correction unit 9A (and thus the substrate 93). In other words, in the reference state of the substrates 93 and 94, the so-called parallax effect is not exhibited, and the dimming action by the linear regions 53a, 53b, 54a, 54b is constant.

 基板93を図18の基準状態から図18中反時計廻りに所定角度だけ回転させ且つ基板94を図18の基準状態から図18中時計廻りに所定角度だけ回転させると、図19に太線で示すように、例えば3つの線状領域53aと3つの線状領域54aとが光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合い且つ3つの線状領域53bと3つの線状領域54bとが光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合う状態が得られる。図19に示す状態において、互いに重なり合う3つの線状領域53aと54aとからなる組み合わせ減光領域55aおよび互いに重なり合う3つの線状領域53bと54bとからなる組み合わせ減光領域55bは、いわゆる視差の効果により、光の入射角度が大きくなるにつれて減光率が単調に増大する減光作用を発揮する。ここで、3つの線状領域53aと54aとからなる組み合わせ減光領域55aは面光源20aからの光に作用し、3つの線状領域53bと54bとからなる組み合わせ減光領域55bは面光源20bからの光に作用する。 When the substrate 93 is rotated from the reference state of FIG. 18 by a predetermined angle counterclockwise in FIG. 18 and the substrate 94 is rotated from the reference state of FIG. 18 by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 18, the thick line is shown in FIG. Thus, for example, the three linear regions 53a and the three linear regions 54a overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction, and the three linear regions 53b and the three linear regions 54b are viewed from the optical axis AX direction. To overlap each other. In the state shown in FIG. 19, the combined dimming region 55a composed of three linear regions 53a and 54a that overlap each other and the combined dimming region 55b composed of three linear regions 53b and 54b that overlap each other have a so-called parallax effect. As a result, a dimming effect in which the dimming rate monotonously increases as the incident angle of light increases is exhibited. Here, the combined dimming region 55a composed of the three linear regions 53a and 54a acts on the light from the surface light source 20a, and the combined dimming region 55b composed of the three linear regions 53b and 54b is the surface light source 20b. Acts on the light from.

 さらに、基板93を図19に示す状態から図18中反時計廻りに所定角度だけ回転させ且つ基板94を図19に示す状態から図18中時計廻りに所定角度だけ回転させると、図20に太線で示すように、例えば5つの線状領域53aと5つの線状領域54aとが光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合い且つ5つの線状領域53bと5つの線状領域54bとが光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合う状態が得られる。すなわち、線状領域53a,53b,54a,54bが光軸AX方向から見て重なり合う重複領域55a,55bは、図19に示す状態よりも増大する。図20に示す状態において、5つの線状領域53aと54aとからなる組み合わせ減光領域55aおよび5つの線状領域53bと54bとからなる組み合わせ減光領域55bは、光の入射角度が大きくなるにつれて減光率が単調に増大する減光作用を発揮する。 Furthermore, when the substrate 93 is rotated by a predetermined angle counterclockwise in FIG. 18 from the state shown in FIG. 19 and the substrate 94 is rotated by a predetermined angle clockwise in FIG. 18 from the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, for example, the five linear regions 53 a and the five linear regions 54 a overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction, and the five linear regions 53 b and the five linear regions 54 b are in the optical axis AX direction. As a result, the overlapping state can be obtained. That is, the overlapping regions 55a and 55b where the linear regions 53a, 53b, 54a, and 54b overlap when viewed from the optical axis AX direction are larger than the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 20, the combined dimming region 55a composed of the five linear regions 53a and 54a and the combined dimming region 55b composed of the five linear regions 53b and 54b increase as the incident angle of light increases. Demonstrates a dimming effect in which the dimming rate increases monotonously.

 このように、補正ユニット9Aでは、第1基板93と第2基板94との光軸AX廻りの相対的な回転位置の変化に応じて、第1減光パターン(53a,53b)と第2減光パターン(54a,54b)とが光軸AX方向から見て重なり合う重複領域55a,55bの大きさが変化するように構成されている。補正ユニット9Aは、第1基板93に対する光の入射角度が一定であるとき、第1減光パターン(53a,53b)と第2減光パターン(54a,54b)との重複領域55a,55bが大きくなるにつれて減光率が増大する減光作用を発揮する。 As described above, in the correction unit 9A, the first dimming pattern (53a, 53b) and the second dimming pattern are changed according to the change in the relative rotational position of the first substrate 93 and the second substrate 94 around the optical axis AX. The size of the overlapping regions 55a and 55b where the light patterns (54a and 54b) overlap with each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction is changed. In the correction unit 9A, when the incident angle of light with respect to the first substrate 93 is constant, the overlapping regions 55a and 55b between the first dimming pattern (53a and 53b) and the second dimming pattern (54a and 54b) are large. As it becomes, the dimming effect of increasing the dimming rate is exhibited.

 すなわち、補正ユニット9Aでは、第1基板93と第2基板94との光軸AX廻りの相対位置の変化および第1基板93への光の入射角度の変化に応じて、第1減光パターン(53a,53b)および第2減光パターン(54a,54b)による減光率が変化する。したがって、上述の第1実施形態の場合と同様に、図16の変形例にかかる補正ユニット9Aの減光作用により、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の各点に関する瞳強度分布をそれぞれ独立的に調整することができ、ひいては各点に関する瞳強度分布を互いにほぼ同じ性状の分布に調整することが可能である。 That is, in the correction unit 9A, the first dimming pattern (in accordance with the change in the relative position of the first substrate 93 and the second substrate 94 around the optical axis AX and the change in the incident angle of the light to the first substrate 93). 53a, 53b) and the second light attenuation pattern (54a, 54b) change the light attenuation rate. Accordingly, as in the case of the first embodiment described above, the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER on the wafer W is independently determined by the dimming action of the correction unit 9A according to the modification of FIG. It is possible to adjust the pupil intensity distribution for each point to distributions having substantially the same properties.

 なお、図16の変形例では、基板93および94の双方を光軸AX廻りに回転させているが、これに限定されることなく、基板93および94のうちの少なくとも一方を光軸AX廻りに回転させることにより補正ユニットを構成することもできる。また、図16の変形例では、図16および図17に示す特定の形態にしたがって、光軸AXに対して垂直に配置された平行平面板の形態を有する一対の基板93および94により補正ユニット9Aを構成している。しかしながら、これに限定されることなく、補正ユニット9Aの具体的な構成については、様々な形態が可能である。 In the modification of FIG. 16, both the substrates 93 and 94 are rotated around the optical axis AX. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the substrates 93 and 94 is rotated around the optical axis AX. The correction unit can also be configured by rotating. Further, in the modification of FIG. 16, according to the specific form shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the correction unit 9A is composed of a pair of substrates 93 and 94 having the form of a plane parallel plate arranged perpendicular to the optical axis AX. Is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various forms are possible for the specific configuration of the correction unit 9A.

 例えば、補正ユニット9Aを構成する基板の形態(外形形状など)、基板の姿勢、各減光パターンを形成する単位減光領域の数、単位減光領域の形状、単位減光領域の形成面の位置(入射面または射出面)、単位減光領域の分布の形態、補正ユニット9Aの配置位置などについて、様々な形態が可能である。具体的に、図16の変形例では、光透過性の基板93,94として、例えば少なくとも一方の面が曲率を有するような基板を用いることができる。 For example, the form of the substrate constituting the correction unit 9A (outer shape, etc.), the posture of the substrate, the number of unit dimming areas forming each dimming pattern, the shape of the unit dimming area, the formation surface of the unit dimming area Various forms are possible with respect to the position (incident surface or exit surface), the distribution form of the unit attenuation region, the arrangement position of the correction unit 9A, and the like. Specifically, in the modification of FIG. 16, as the light transmissive substrates 93 and 94, for example, a substrate having at least one surface having a curvature can be used.

 また、図16の変形例では、一対の基板93と94とが光軸AX廻りに相対的に回転可能に構成されている。しかしながら、これに限定されることなく、光軸AXを横切る方向(典型的には光軸AXと直交するXY平面に沿った任意の方向)に相対的に移動可能な一対の基板により、図16の変形例にかかる補正ユニット9Aと同様の作用を奏する補正ユニットを構成することもできる。この場合、第1基板と第2基板との光軸を横切る方向に沿った相対位置の変化に応じて、第1減光パターンと第2減光パターンとが光軸方向から見て重なり合う重複領域の大きさが変化するように構成されていることが重要である。 In the modification of FIG. 16, the pair of substrates 93 and 94 are configured to be relatively rotatable around the optical axis AX. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pair of substrates that are relatively movable in a direction crossing the optical axis AX (typically, any direction along the XY plane orthogonal to the optical axis AX) can be used. A correction unit having the same operation as that of the correction unit 9A according to the modified example can be configured. In this case, the overlapping region where the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern overlap as seen from the optical axis direction according to the change in the relative position along the direction crossing the optical axis between the first substrate and the second substrate. It is important that the size of the is changed.

 また、上述の第1実施形態およびその変形例では、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍の照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布20の形成面よりも後側(マスク側)に、補正ユニット9(9A)を配置している。しかしながら、これに限定されることなく、瞳強度分布20の形成面の位置、またはその前側(光源側)に、補正ユニット9(9A)を配置することもできる。また、マイクロフライアイレンズ8よりも後側の別の照明瞳の位置またはその近傍、例えば結像光学系12の前側レンズ群12aと後側レンズ群12bとの間の照明瞳の位置またはその近傍に、補正ユニット9(9A)を配置することもできる。 Further, in the first embodiment described above and the modifications thereof, the rear side of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or the rear side (mask side) of the pupil intensity distribution 20 formed on the illumination pupil near the rear focal plane. The correction unit 9 (9A) is arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correction unit 9 (9A) can also be arranged at the position of the formation surface of the pupil intensity distribution 20 or the front side (light source side) thereof. Further, the position of the illumination pupil on the rear side of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or the vicinity thereof, for example, the position of the illumination pupil between the front lens group 12a and the rear lens group 12b of the imaging optical system 12 or the vicinity thereof. Further, the correction unit 9 (9A) can be arranged.

 一般的に、照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布を補正する本発明の第1形態にかかる補正ユニットは、照明瞳の前側に隣接するパワーを有する光学素子と当該照明瞳の後側に隣接するパワーを有する光学素子との間の照明瞳空間に配置されて光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第1基板と、照明瞳空間において第1基板よりも後側に配置されて光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第2基板とを備えている。第1基板には第1減光パターンが形成され、第2基板には第1減光パターンに対応して第2減光パターンが形成され、第1減光パターンと第2減光パターンとの相対位置は変更可能である。すなわち、第1基板および第2基板のうちの少なくとも一方は、所定の方向に移動可能または所定軸線廻りに回転可能に構成されている。なお、「照明瞳空間」内には、パワーを持たない平行平面板や平面鏡が存在していても良い。 Generally, the correction unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil is adjacent to the optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and the rear side of the illumination pupil. A light-transmissive first substrate disposed in an illumination pupil space between the optical elements having power and having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis; and disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space. And a light transmissive second substrate having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis. A first dimming pattern is formed on the first substrate, a second dimming pattern is formed on the second substrate corresponding to the first dimming pattern, and the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern are The relative position can be changed. That is, at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate is configured to be movable in a predetermined direction or rotatable about a predetermined axis. In the “illumination pupil space”, there may be a parallel plane plate or a plane mirror having no power.

 また、上述の第1実施形態およびその変形例では、基板の減光パターンを形成する単位減光領域が、例えばクロムや酸化クロム等からなる遮光性ドットにより、入射光を遮る遮光領域として形成されている。しかしながら、これに限定されることなく、単位減光領域については、遮光領域の形態以外の形態も可能である。例えば、複数の減光パターンのうちの少なくとも一方を、入射光を散乱させる散乱領域として、あるいは入射光を回折させる回折領域として形成することも可能である。一般に、光透過性の基板の所要領域に粗面化加工を施すことにより散乱領域が形成され、所要領域に回折面形成加工を施すことにより回折領域が形成される。 In the above-described first embodiment and its modification, the unit attenuation region that forms the dimming pattern of the substrate is formed as a light-blocking region that blocks incident light by a light-blocking dot made of, for example, chromium or chromium oxide. ing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the unit dimming area may have a form other than the form of the light shielding area. For example, at least one of the plurality of dimming patterns can be formed as a scattering region for scattering incident light or as a diffraction region for diffracting incident light. Generally, a scattering region is formed by roughening a required region of a light-transmitting substrate, and a diffraction region is formed by applying a diffractive surface forming process to the required region.

 図21は、本発明の第2実施形態にかかる露光装置の構成を概略的に示す図である。図21において、感光性基板であるウェハWの露光面(転写面)の法線方向に沿ってZ軸を、ウェハWの露光面内において図21の紙面に平行な方向にY軸を、ウェハWの露光面内において図21の紙面に垂直な方向にX軸をそれぞれ設定している。第2実施形態は、第1実施形態と類似の構成を有するが、特に補正ユニット19の構成が第1実施形態と相違している。 FIG. 21 is a drawing schematically showing a configuration of an exposure apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In FIG. 21, the Z-axis is along the normal direction of the exposure surface (transfer surface) of wafer W, which is a photosensitive substrate, and the Y-axis is in the direction parallel to the paper surface of FIG. Within the W exposure surface, the X axis is set in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. The second embodiment has a configuration similar to that of the first embodiment, but particularly the configuration of the correction unit 19 is different from that of the first embodiment.

 さらに詳細には、第1実施形態ではアフォーカルレンズ4の瞳位置またはその近傍に濃度フィルター5および円錐アキシコン系6が配置されているが、第2実施形態では濃度フィルターが不要であるため設置されておらず、円錐アキシコン系は必要に応じて設置可能であるがその設置を省略している。図21では、図1の第1実施形態における要素と同様の機能を有する構成要素に、図1と同じ参照符号を付している。以下、第1実施形態との相違点に着目し、第1実施形態との重複する説明を省略して第2実施形態の構成および作用を説明する。 More specifically, in the first embodiment, the density filter 5 and the conical axicon system 6 are arranged at or near the pupil position of the afocal lens 4, but in the second embodiment, the density filter is not necessary and is installed. However, the conical axicon system can be installed if necessary, but its installation is omitted. In FIG. 21, the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 1 are assigned to components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment of FIG. In the following, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment, explanations of the configuration and operation of the second embodiment will be described while omitting the overlapping description with the first embodiment.

 第2実施形態の露光装置では、光源1から射出された光が、整形光学系2および輪帯照明用の回折光学素子3を介して、アフォーカルレンズ4に入射する。アフォーカルレンズ4を経た光は、所定面IPおよびズームレンズ7を介して、マイクロフライアイレンズ8に入射する。マイクロフライアイレンズ8に入射した光束は二次元的に分割され、その後側焦点面またはその近傍の照明瞳には、例えば光軸AXを中心とした輪帯状の実質的な面光源からなる二次光源(瞳強度分布)が形成される。マイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍には、補正ユニット19が配置されている。補正ユニット19の構成および作用については後述する。 In the exposure apparatus of the second embodiment, light emitted from the light source 1 enters the afocal lens 4 via the shaping optical system 2 and the diffractive optical element 3 for annular illumination. The light passing through the afocal lens 4 enters the micro fly's eye lens 8 through the predetermined surface IP and the zoom lens 7. The light beam incident on the micro fly's eye lens 8 is two-dimensionally divided, and the illumination pupil at or near the rear focal plane thereof is, for example, a secondary comprising a substantial surface light source having an annular shape centering on the optical axis AX. A light source (pupil intensity distribution) is formed. A correction unit 19 is disposed at or near the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8. The configuration and operation of the correction unit 19 will be described later.

 マイクロフライアイレンズ8および補正ユニット19を経た光は、コンデンサー光学系10、マスクブラインド11および結像光学系12を介して、マスクMを重畳的に照明する。マスクMのパターン領域を透過した光は、投影光学系PLを介して、ウェハW上にマスクパターンの像を形成する。こうして、ステップ・アンド・スキャン方式にしたがって、X方向(走査方向)に沿ってマスクMとウェハWとを同期的に移動(走査)させることにより、ウェハWのショット領域(露光領域)にマスクパターンが走査露光される。 The light that has passed through the micro fly's eye lens 8 and the correction unit 19 illuminates the mask M in a superimposed manner via the condenser optical system 10, the mask blind 11, and the imaging optical system 12. The light that has passed through the pattern area of the mask M forms an image of the mask pattern on the wafer W via the projection optical system PL. In this way, the mask pattern in the shot area (exposure area) of the wafer W is obtained by synchronously moving (scanning) the mask M and the wafer W along the X direction (scanning direction) in accordance with the step-and-scan method. Are subjected to scanning exposure.

 以下の説明では、第2実施形態の作用効果の理解を容易にするために、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍の照明瞳には、図22に示すような4極状の瞳強度分布(二次光源)30が形成されるものとする。補正ユニット19は、4極状の瞳強度分布30の形成面の直後に配置されているものとする。以下の説明において単に「照明瞳」という場合には、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍の照明瞳を指すものとする。 In the following description, in order to facilitate understanding of the effects of the second embodiment, a quadrupolar shape as shown in FIG. 22 is provided on the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or in the vicinity of the illumination pupil. It is assumed that a pupil intensity distribution (secondary light source) 30 is formed. It is assumed that the correction unit 19 is disposed immediately after the formation surface of the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 30. In the following description, the term “illumination pupil” simply refers to the illumination pupil at or near the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8.

 図22を参照すると、照明瞳に形成される4極状の瞳強度分布30は、光軸AXを挟んでX方向に間隔を隔てた一対の円弧状の実質的な面光源30a,30bと、光軸AXを挟んでZ方向に間隔を隔てた一対の円弧状の実質的な面光源(以下、単に「面光源」という)30c,30dとを有する。なお、照明瞳におけるX方向はマイクロフライアイレンズ8の矩形状の微小レンズの短辺方向(すなわち単位波面分割面の短辺方向)であって、ウェハWの走査方向に対応している。また、照明瞳におけるZ方向は、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の矩形状の微小レンズの長辺方向(すなわち単位波面分割面の長辺方向)であって、ウェハWの走査方向と直交する走査直交方向(ウェハW上におけるY方向)に対応している。 Referring to FIG. 22, a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 30 formed on the illumination pupil includes a pair of arcuate substantial surface light sources 30a and 30b spaced apart in the X direction across the optical axis AX, And a pair of arc-shaped substantial surface light sources (hereinafter simply referred to as “surface light sources”) 30 c and 30 d spaced apart in the Z direction across the optical axis AX. The X direction in the illumination pupil is the short-side direction of the rectangular microlens of the micro fly's eye lens 8 (that is, the short-side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface) and corresponds to the scanning direction of the wafer W. The Z direction in the illumination pupil is the long side direction of the rectangular microlens of the micro fly's eye lens 8 (that is, the long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface), and the scanning orthogonal direction orthogonal to the scanning direction of the wafer W (Y direction on the wafer W).

 ウェハW上には、第1実施形態の説明において参照した図3に示すように、Y方向に沿って長辺を有し且つX方向に沿って短辺を有する矩形状の静止露光領域ERが形成され、この静止露光領域ERに対応するように、マスクM上には矩形状の照明領域(不図示)が形成される。ここで、静止露光領域ER内の1点に入射する光が照明瞳に形成する4極状の瞳強度分布は、入射点の位置に依存することなく、互いにほぼ同じ形状を有する。しかしながら、4極状の瞳強度分布を構成する各面光源の光強度は、入射点の位置に依存して異なる場合がある。 On the wafer W, as shown in FIG. 3 referred to in the description of the first embodiment, a rectangular still exposure region ER having a long side along the Y direction and a short side along the X direction. A rectangular illumination area (not shown) is formed on the mask M so as to correspond to the static exposure area ER. Here, the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil by light incident on one point in the still exposure region ER has substantially the same shape without depending on the position of the incident point. However, the light intensity of each surface light source constituting the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution may differ depending on the position of the incident point.

 比較的単純な一例として、静止露光領域ER内の周辺の点P2,P3に入射する光が、図23,図24に模式的に示す4極状の瞳強度分布を照明瞳にそれぞれ形成する場合について考える。すなわち、静止露光領域ER内の中心点P1から+Y方向に間隔を隔てた周辺の点P2に入射する光が形成する4極状の瞳強度分布32では、図23に示すように、面光源32a,32bおよび32dの光強度が互いにほぼ等しく、面光源32cの光強度は他の面光源の光強度よりも大きいものとする。 As a relatively simple example, light incident on peripheral points P2 and P3 in the still exposure region ER forms a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution schematically shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, respectively, on the illumination pupil. think about. That is, in the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 32 formed by the light incident on the peripheral point P2 spaced from the central point P1 in the still exposure region ER in the + Y direction, as shown in FIG. 23, as shown in FIG. 32b and 32d are substantially equal to each other, and the light intensity of the surface light source 32c is greater than the light intensity of the other surface light sources.

 また、静止露光領域ER内の中心点P1から-Y方向に間隔を隔てた周辺の点P3に入射する光が形成する4極状の瞳強度分布33では、図24に示すように、面光源33a,33bおよび33cの光強度が互いにほぼ等しく、面光源33dの光強度は他の面光源の光強度よりも大きいものとする。このように、ウェハW上の各点に関する瞳強度分布において光軸AXを挟んでZ方向(走査直交方向(ウェハW上におけるY方向)に対応する方向)に間隔を隔てた一対の領域の光強度の差が大き過ぎると、ショット領域(図23および図24に示す例の場合には周辺点P2,P3に対応する周辺の位置)に焼き付けられるパターンが所望の位置から位置ずれする恐れがある。 Further, in the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 33 formed by the light incident on the peripheral point P3 spaced in the −Y direction from the center point P1 in the still exposure region ER, as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the light intensities of 33a, 33b and 33c are substantially equal to each other, and the light intensity of the surface light source 33d is larger than the light intensities of other surface light sources. As described above, in the pupil intensity distribution regarding each point on the wafer W, the light of a pair of regions spaced apart in the Z direction (direction corresponding to the scanning orthogonal direction (Y direction on the wafer W)) across the optical axis AX. If the difference in intensity is too large, the pattern printed on the shot area (the peripheral positions corresponding to the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the example shown in FIGS. 23 and 24) may be displaced from the desired position. .

 第2実施形態では、周辺点P2,P3に関する瞳強度分布32,33において光軸AXを挟んでZ方向に間隔を隔てた一対の面光源32cと32dとの間および一対の面光源33cと33dとの間の光強度の差を調整するための調整手段として、補正ユニット19を備えている。補正ユニット19は、図25および図26に示すように、光軸AX(Y方向に対応)に沿って所定の厚さを有する3つの光透過性の基板191、192および193を備えている。各基板191~193は、例えば石英または蛍石のような光学材料により形成された平行平面板の形態を有する。 In the second embodiment, in the pupil intensity distributions 32 and 33 relating to the peripheral points P2 and P3, between the pair of surface light sources 32c and 32d and the pair of surface light sources 33c and 33d spaced apart in the Z direction with the optical axis AX interposed therebetween. A correction unit 19 is provided as an adjustment means for adjusting the difference in light intensity between the two. As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the correction unit 19 includes three light transmissive substrates 191, 192, and 193 having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis AX (corresponding to the Y direction). Each of the substrates 191 to 193 has the form of a plane parallel plate formed of an optical material such as quartz or fluorite.

 第1基板191は、例えば光軸AXを中心とする円形状の外形形状を有し、その入射面191aが光軸AXと直交するような姿勢で固定的に位置決めされている。第2基板192は、第1基板191の後側に配置されて、面光源30cからの光が通過する領域に対応する外形形状、例えば扇形状の外形形状を有する。また、第2基板192は、その入射面192aが光軸AXと直交する姿勢を維持しつつ、Z方向(単位波面分割面の長辺方向)に移動可能に構成されている。 The first substrate 191 has, for example, a circular outer shape centered on the optical axis AX, and is fixedly positioned in such a posture that its incident surface 191a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX. The second substrate 192 is disposed on the rear side of the first substrate 191 and has an outer shape corresponding to a region through which light from the surface light source 30c passes, for example, a fan-shaped outer shape. In addition, the second substrate 192 is configured to be movable in the Z direction (long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing plane) while maintaining the posture in which the incident surface 192a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX.

 第3基板193は、第1基板191の後側に配置されて、面光源30dからの光が通過する領域に対応する外形形状、例えば扇形状の外形形状を有する。また、第3基板193は、その入射面193aが光軸AXと直交する姿勢を維持しつつ、Z方向に移動可能に構成されている。以下、説明を単純化するために、第2基板192と第3基板193とは光軸AXを通るXY平面に関して対称な構成を有し、第2基板192の入射面192aと第3基板193の入射面193aとは同一面上にあるものとする。補正ユニット19では、駆動制御系194からの指令に基づき、第2基板192および第3基板193がそれぞれZ方向に移動する。 The third substrate 193 is disposed on the rear side of the first substrate 191 and has an outer shape corresponding to a region through which light from the surface light source 30d passes, for example, a fan-shaped outer shape. Further, the third substrate 193 is configured to be movable in the Z direction while maintaining the posture in which the incident surface 193a is orthogonal to the optical axis AX. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the description, the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 have a symmetric configuration with respect to the XY plane passing through the optical axis AX, and the incident surface 192a of the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 The incident surface 193a is on the same plane. In the correction unit 19, the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 move in the Z direction based on a command from the drive control system 194.

 図27を参照すると、基板191の射出面191b、基板192の入射面192a、および基板193の入射面193abには、互いに同じ外形形状および同じ大きさを有する遮光性ドット151、152および153が、所定の分布にしたがって形成されている。ここで、単位減光領域としての各遮光性ドット151~153は、例えばクロムや酸化クロム等からなる。また、遮光性ドット151は、遮光性ドット152および153に一対一対応するように分布形成されている。ここで、一群の遮光性ドット151は面光源30cおよび30dからの光に作用するように配置され、一群の遮光性ドット152は面光源30cからの光に作用するように配置され、一群の遮光性ドット153は面光源30dからの光に作用するように配置されている。 Referring to FIG. 27, on the exit surface 191b of the substrate 191, the incident surface 192a of the substrate 192, and the incident surface 193ab of the substrate 193, light-shielding dots 151, 152, and 153 having the same outer shape and the same size are provided. It is formed according to a predetermined distribution. Here, each of the light-shielding dots 151 to 153 as the unit dimming region is made of, for example, chromium or chromium oxide. Further, the light shielding dots 151 are distributed so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the light shielding dots 152 and 153. Here, the group of light shielding dots 151 are arranged so as to act on the light from the surface light sources 30c and 30d, and the group of light shielding dots 152 are arranged so as to act on the light from the surface light source 30c. The characteristic dots 153 are arranged so as to act on the light from the surface light source 30d.

 図27では、図面の明瞭化のために、基板191の射出面191bに形成された一対の遮光性ドット151、基板192の入射面192aに形成された1つの遮光性ドット152、基板193の入射面193aに形成された1つの遮光性ドット153だけを示している。以下、説明の理解を容易にするために、各遮光性ドット151~153は円形状の外形形状を有し、第2基板192の基準状態(基準位置)では遮光性ドット151と152とが光軸AX方向に見て互いに重なり合い、第3基板193の基準状態では遮光性ドット151と153とが光軸AX方向に見て互いに重なり合うものとする。また、説明の理解を容易にするために、基板191の一対の遮光性ドット151、基板192の1つの遮光性ドット152、および基板193の1つの遮光性ドット153だけに着目して、補正ユニット19の作用を説明する。 In FIG. 27, for the sake of clarity, a pair of light-shielding dots 151 formed on the exit surface 191b of the substrate 191, one light-shielding dot 152 formed on the incident surface 192a of the substrate 192, and the incidence of the substrate 193. Only one light-shielding dot 153 formed on the surface 193a is shown. Hereinafter, in order to facilitate understanding of the description, each of the light shielding dots 151 to 153 has a circular outer shape, and the light shielding dots 151 and 152 are light-transmitted in the reference state (reference position) of the second substrate 192. It is assumed that the light-shielding dots 151 and 153 overlap each other when viewed in the optical axis AX direction in the reference state of the third substrate 193 when viewed in the axis AX direction. In order to facilitate understanding of the explanation, the correction unit is focused on only the pair of light shielding dots 151 on the substrate 191, one light shielding dot 152 on the substrate 192, and one light shielding dot 153 on the substrate 193. The operation of 19 will be described.

 第2基板192の基準状態において、円形状の遮光性ドット151と152との組み合わせからなる組み合わせ減光領域に対して光軸AXに平行な光が入射すると、補正ユニット19の直後であって射出面192bに平行な面において、図28(a)に示すように、円形状の遮光性ドット151により減光された領域151aと、円形状の遮光性ドット152により減光された領域152aとは互いに重なり合う。すなわち、補正ユニット19の直後において、円形状の減光領域151aと152aとは、円形状の減光領域151aの1個分の面積を有する減光領域を形成する。 In the reference state of the second substrate 192, when light parallel to the optical axis AX is incident on the combined light reduction region composed of the combination of the circular light shielding dots 151 and 152, the light is emitted immediately after the correction unit 19 and emitted. On the surface parallel to the surface 192b, as shown in FIG. 28A, the region 151a dimmed by the circular light-shielding dot 151 and the region 152a dimmed by the circular light-shielding dot 152 are Overlap each other. That is, immediately after the correction unit 19, the circular dimming areas 151a and 152a form a dimming area having an area corresponding to one of the circular dimming areas 151a.

 第2基板192の基準状態において、円形状の遮光性ドット151と152とからなる組み合わせ減光領域に入射する光の光軸AXに対する角度が例えばYZ平面に沿って0度から単調に増大すると、補正ユニット19の直後において、図28(b)に示すように、減光領域151aおよび152aが互いに異なる距離だけZ方向に移動し、減光領域151aと152aとの重なり合う領域が単調に減少する。その結果、図28(b)に示す状態では、円形状の減光領域151aと152aとが、その重なり合う領域の面積に応じて、円形状の減光領域151aの1個分の面積よりも大きく且つ2個分の面積よりも小さい面積を有する減光領域を形成する。 In the reference state of the second substrate 192, when the angle with respect to the optical axis AX of the light incident on the combined dimming region composed of the circular light shielding dots 151 and 152 increases monotonously from 0 degrees along the YZ plane, for example, Immediately after the correction unit 19, as shown in FIG. 28B, the dimming areas 151a and 152a move in the Z direction by different distances, and the area where the dimming areas 151a and 152a overlap is monotonously reduced. As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 28B, the circular dimming regions 151a and 152a are larger than the area of one circular dimming region 151a according to the area of the overlapping region. A dimming region having an area smaller than the area of two is formed.

 こうして、第2基板192の基準状態において、円形状の遮光性ドット151と152とからなる組み合わせ減光領域は、第1基板191に対する光の入射角度が大きくなるにつれて減光率が増大する減光作用を発揮する。同様に、第3基板193の基準状態において、円形状の遮光性ドット151と153とからなる組み合わせ減光領域は、第1基板191に対する光の入射角度が大きくなるにつれて減光率が増大する減光作用を発揮する。 Thus, in the reference state of the second substrate 192, the combined light reduction region composed of the circular light shielding dots 151 and 152 has a light attenuation rate that increases as the incident angle of light with respect to the first substrate 191 increases. Demonstrate the effect. Similarly, in the reference state of the third substrate 193, the combined light reduction region composed of the circular light shielding dots 151 and 153 is a decrease in which the light reduction rate increases as the incident angle of light with respect to the first substrate 191 increases. Exhibits light action.

 次に、第1基板191に対する光の入射角度が一定であるとき、例えば光の入射角度が0度であるとき(入射する光の光軸AXに対する角度が0度であるとき)に、第2基板192が基準状態からZ方向に移動する場合について考える。上述したように、第2基板192が基準状態にある場合、補正ユニット19の直後において、円形状の遮光性ドット151により減光された領域151aと、円形状の遮光性ドット152により減光された領域152aとは互いに重なり合う。すなわち、図28(a)に示すように、補正ユニット19の直後において、円形状の減光領域151aと152aとは、円形状の減光領域151aの1個分の面積を有する減光領域を形成する。 Next, when the incident angle of light with respect to the first substrate 191 is constant, for example, when the incident angle of light is 0 degrees (when the angle of the incident light with respect to the optical axis AX is 0 degrees), the second Consider the case where the substrate 192 moves in the Z direction from the reference state. As described above, when the second substrate 192 is in the reference state, immediately after the correction unit 19, the light is attenuated by the region 151 a dimmed by the circular light shielding dot 151 and the circular light shielding dot 152. The regions 152a overlap each other. That is, as shown in FIG. 28A, immediately after the correction unit 19, the circular dimming areas 151a and 152a are dimming areas having an area corresponding to one of the circular dimming areas 151a. Form.

 一方、第2基板192が基準状態からZ方向に単調に移動すると、補正ユニット19の直後において、減光領域152aがZ方向に移動して減光領域151aと重なり合う領域が単調に減少する。すなわち、図28(b)に示すように、補正ユニット19の直後において、円形状の減光領域151aと152aとが、その重なり合う領域の面積に応じて、円形状の減光領域151aの1個分の面積よりも大きく且つ2個分の面積よりも小さい面積を有する減光領域を形成する。 On the other hand, when the second substrate 192 moves monotonously from the reference state in the Z direction, immediately after the correction unit 19, the dimming area 152a moves in the Z direction and the area overlapping the dimming area 151a monotonously decreases. That is, as shown in FIG. 28B, immediately after the correction unit 19, the circular dimming regions 151a and 152a correspond to one of the circular dimming regions 151a according to the area of the overlapping region. A dimming region having an area larger than the area of the minute and smaller than the area of the two is formed.

 こうして、第1基板191に対する光の入射角度が0度であるとき、一般的には光の入射角度が一定であるとき、円形状の遮光性ドット151と152とからなる組み合わせ減光領域は、第2基板192の基準状態からのZ方向に沿った移動量が大きくなるにつれて減光率が増大する減光作用を発揮する。同様に、第1基板191に対する光の入射角度が一定であるとき、円形状の遮光性ドット151と153とからなる組み合わせ減光領域は、第3基板193の基準状態からのZ方向に沿った移動量が大きくなるにつれて減光率が増大する減光作用を発揮する。 Thus, when the incident angle of light with respect to the first substrate 191 is 0 degree, when the incident angle of light is generally constant, the combined dimming region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 151 and 152 is As the amount of movement along the Z direction from the reference state of the second substrate 192 increases, the light reduction rate increases. Similarly, when the incident angle of light with respect to the first substrate 191 is constant, the combined dimming region composed of the circular light-shielding dots 151 and 153 extends along the Z direction from the reference state of the third substrate 193. It exhibits a dimming effect in which the dimming rate increases as the amount of movement increases.

 第2実施形態では、第1基板191と第2基板192とは、単位減光領域である円形状の遮光性ドット151と152とが光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合う基準状態を中心として、遮光性ドット151の一部と遮光性ドット152の一部とが光軸AX方向から見て重なり合う範囲内で相対移動可能に構成されている。同様に、第1基板191と第3基板193とは、単位減光領域である円形状の遮光性ドット151と153とが光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合う基準状態を中心として、遮光性ドット151の一部と遮光性ドット153の一部とが光軸AX方向から見て重なり合う範囲内で相対移動可能に構成されている。 In the second embodiment, the first substrate 191 and the second substrate 192 are centered on a reference state in which circular light-shielding dots 151 and 152 that are unit dimming regions overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction. A part of the light-shielding dot 151 and a part of the light-shielding dot 152 are configured to be relatively movable within a range where they overlap when viewed from the optical axis AX direction. Similarly, the first substrate 191 and the third substrate 193 have a light-shielding dot centered on a reference state in which circular light-shielding dots 151 and 153 that are unit dimming regions overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction. A part of 151 and a part of light-shielding dot 153 are configured to be relatively movable within a range where they overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction.

 なお、図25に示すように、補正ユニット19は、4極状の瞳強度分布30のうち、光軸AXを挟んでZ方向に間隔を隔てた一対の面光源30cおよび30dからの光に作用する。しかしながら、補正ユニット19は、光軸AXを挟んでX方向に間隔を隔てた一対の面光源30aおよび30bからの光には作用しない。 As shown in FIG. 25, the correction unit 19 acts on the light from the pair of surface light sources 30c and 30d spaced apart in the Z direction across the optical axis AX in the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution 30. To do. However, the correction unit 19 does not act on the light from the pair of surface light sources 30a and 30b spaced in the X direction across the optical axis AX.

 また、図29に示すように、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の中心点P1に達する光、すなわちマスクブラインド11の開口部の中心点P1’に達する光は、補正ユニット19に対して(すなわち第1基板191に対して)入射角度0で入射する。換言すれば、中心点P1に関する瞳強度分布31の面光源31cからの光は入射角度0で第1基板191および第2基板192に入射し、面光源31dからの光は入射角度0で第1基板191および第3基板193に入射する。なお、瞳強度分布31の図示を省略しているが、各面光源31a~31dは、瞳強度分布32(33)の各面光源32a~32d(33a~33d)と同様に形成される。 Further, as shown in FIG. 29, the light reaching the center point P1 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W, that is, the light reaching the center point P1 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 is transmitted to the correction unit 19 ( That is, it is incident on the first substrate 191) at an incident angle of zero. In other words, the light from the surface light source 31c of the pupil intensity distribution 31 with respect to the center point P1 is incident on the first substrate 191 and the second substrate 192 at the incident angle 0, and the light from the surface light source 31d is the first at the incident angle 0. The light enters the substrate 191 and the third substrate 193. Although illustration of the pupil intensity distribution 31 is omitted, the surface light sources 31a to 31d are formed in the same manner as the surface light sources 32a to 32d (33a to 33d) of the pupil intensity distribution 32 (33).

 一方、図30に示すように、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の周辺点P2,P3に達する光、すなわちマスクブラインド11の開口部の周辺点P2’,P3’に達する光は、補正ユニット19に対して比較的大きい入射角度±θで入射する。換言すれば、周辺点P2,P3に関する瞳強度分布32,33の面光源32c,33cからの光は、比較的大きい入射角度±θで第1基板191および第2基板192に入射する。面光源32d,33dからの光は、比較的大きい入射角度±θで第1基板191および第3基板193にそれぞれ入射する。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the light reaching the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W, that is, the light reaching the peripheral points P2 ′ and P3 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 19 is incident at a relatively large incident angle ± θ. In other words, light from the surface light sources 32c and 33c of the pupil intensity distributions 32 and 33 relating to the peripheral points P2 and P3 is incident on the first substrate 191 and the second substrate 192 at a relatively large incident angle ± θ. Light from the surface light sources 32d and 33d is incident on the first substrate 191 and the third substrate 193, respectively, at a relatively large incident angle ± θ.

 なお、図29および図30において、面光源30c(31c~33c)のZ方向に沿った最外縁の点(図22などを参照)を参照符号B3で示し、面光源30d(31d~33d)のZ方向に沿った最外縁の点(図22などを参照)を参照符号B4で示している。また、図29および図30に関連する説明の理解を容易するために、参照符号B1は面光源30a(31a~33a)のX方向に沿った最外縁の点を示し、参照符号B2は面光源30b(31b~33b)のX方向に沿った最外縁の点を示している。ただし、上述したように、面光源30a(31a~33a)および面光源30b(31b~33b)からの光は、補正ユニット19の作用を受けない。 29 and 30, the outermost point (see FIG. 22 and the like) along the Z direction of the surface light source 30c (31c to 33c) is denoted by reference numeral B3, and the surface light source 30d (31d to 33d) A point at the outermost edge along the Z direction (see FIG. 22 and the like) is indicated by reference sign B4. In order to facilitate understanding of the description related to FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, reference numeral B1 indicates the outermost point along the X direction of the surface light source 30a (31a to 33a), and reference numeral B2 indicates the surface light source. The outermost edge point along the X direction of 30b (31b to 33b) is shown. However, as described above, the light from the surface light sources 30a (31a to 33a) and the surface light sources 30b (31b to 33b) is not affected by the correction unit 19.

 図31、図33および図34は、第1基板に対する第2基板および第3基板の相対位置と補正ユニットの減光作用との関係を説明する図である。図31では、第2基板192が基準状態にあり、第1基板191の遮光性ドット151と第2基板192の遮光性ドット152とが光軸AX方向から見て互いに重なり合っている。一方、第3基板193は基準状態から+Z方向に所定距離だけ移動した状態にあり、第1基板191の遮光性ドット151の一部と第2基板192の遮光性ドット152の一部とが光軸AX方向から見て重なり合っている。 31, FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the relative positions of the second substrate and the third substrate with respect to the first substrate and the dimming action of the correction unit. In FIG. 31, the second substrate 192 is in the reference state, and the light shielding dots 151 on the first substrate 191 and the light shielding dots 152 on the second substrate 192 overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction. On the other hand, the third substrate 193 is moved by a predetermined distance in the + Z direction from the reference state, and part of the light shielding dots 151 on the first substrate 191 and part of the light shielding dots 152 on the second substrate 192 are light. They overlap when viewed from the direction of the axis AX.

 ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の中心点P1に達する光、すなわちマスクブラインド11の開口部の中心点P1’に達する光は、第1基板191に対して入射角度0で入射する。したがって、面光源30cから第1基板191および第2基板192を経て中心点P1’に達する光の場合、遮光性ドット151と152との組み合わせ減光領域により遮られる光の量は最も小さい。面光源30dから第1基板191および第3基板193を経て中心点P1’に達する光の場合、遮光性ドット151と153との組み合わせ減光領域により遮られる光の量は比較的大きい。 The light reaching the center point P 1 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W, that is, the light reaching the center point P 1 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 is incident on the first substrate 191 at an incident angle of 0. Therefore, in the case of light reaching the center point P1 'from the surface light source 30c through the first substrate 191 and the second substrate 192, the amount of light blocked by the combined dimming region of the light blocking dots 151 and 152 is the smallest. In the case of light reaching the center point P1 'from the surface light source 30d through the first substrate 191 and the third substrate 193, the amount of light blocked by the combined light reduction region of the light blocking dots 151 and 153 is relatively large.

 ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の周辺点P2,P3に達する光、すなわちマスクブラインド11の開口部の周辺点P2’,P3’に達する光は、第1基板191に対して比較的大きな入射角度θで入射する。以下、説明を単純化するために、静止露光領域ER内の周辺点P2に対応する周辺点P2’はマスクブラインド11の開口部の+Z方向側に位置し、静止露光領域ER内の周辺点P3に対応する周辺点P3’は-Z方向側に位置するものとする。 The light reaching the peripheral points P2 and P3 in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W, that is, the light reaching the peripheral points P2 ′ and P3 ′ of the opening of the mask blind 11 is relatively incident on the first substrate 191. Incident at an angle θ. Hereinafter, in order to simplify the description, the peripheral point P2 ′ corresponding to the peripheral point P2 in the still exposure region ER is located on the + Z direction side of the opening of the mask blind 11, and the peripheral point P3 in the still exposure region ER. It is assumed that the peripheral point P3 ′ corresponding to is located on the −Z direction side.

 したがって、面光源30cから第1基板191および第2基板192を経て周辺点P2’,P3’に達する光の場合、遮光性ドット151と152との組み合わせ減光領域により遮られる光の量は比較的大きい。面光源30dから第1基板191および第3基板193を経て周辺点P2’に達する光の場合、遮光性ドット151と153との組み合わせ減光領域により遮られる光の量は比較的小さい。面光源30dから第1基板191および第3基板193を経て周辺点P3’に達する光の場合、遮光性ドット151と153との組み合わせ減光領域により遮られる光の量は最も大きい。 Therefore, in the case of light reaching the peripheral points P2 ′ and P3 ′ from the surface light source 30c through the first substrate 191 and the second substrate 192, the amount of light blocked by the combined light reduction region of the light blocking dots 151 and 152 is compared. Big. In the case of light reaching the peripheral point P2 'from the surface light source 30d through the first substrate 191 and the third substrate 193, the amount of light blocked by the combined light reduction region of the light blocking dots 151 and 153 is relatively small. In the case of light reaching the peripheral point P3 'from the surface light source 30d through the first substrate 191 and the third substrate 193, the amount of light blocked by the combined dimming region of the light blocking dots 151 and 153 is the largest.

 すなわち、図32の中央に示すように、中心点P1に関する4極状の瞳強度分布のうち、+Z方向側の面光源31cに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は最も小さく、-Z方向側の面光源31dに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は比較的大きい。このように、図32、並びに関連する図33および図34の該当部分では、補正ユニット19の減光作用の大小を、X方向に細長く延びるハッチング領域のZ方向の幅寸法により模式的に表している。 That is, as shown in the center of FIG. 32, among the quadrupole pupil intensity distributions related to the center point P1, the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 31c on the + Z direction side is the smallest, and the surface on the −Z direction side The dimming effect of the correction unit 19 on the light source 31d is relatively large. Thus, in FIG. 32 and the relevant portions of FIGS. 33 and 34, the magnitude of the dimming action of the correction unit 19 is schematically represented by the width dimension in the Z direction of the hatched area extending in the X direction. Yes.

 また、図32の左側に示すように、周辺点P2に関する4極状の瞳強度分布のうち、面光源32cに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は比較的大きく、面光源32dに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は比較的小さい。また、図32の右側に示すように、周辺点P3に関する4極状の瞳強度分布のうち、面光源33cに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は比較的大きく、面光源33dに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は最も大きい。 Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 32, in the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral point P2, the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32c is relatively large, and the reduction by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32d. The light effect is relatively small. Further, as shown on the right side of FIG. 32, in the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral point P3, the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33c is relatively large, and the reduction by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33d. The light effect is the largest.

 また、図33に示すように、第2基板192が基準状態から-Z方向に所定距離だけ移動し且つ第3基板193が基準状態から+Z方向に所定距離だけ移動した状態では、中心点P1に関する4極状の瞳強度分布のうち、面光源31cに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用および面光源31dに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用はともに比較的大きい。周辺点P2に関する4極状の瞳強度分布のうち、面光源32cに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は最も大きく、面光源32dに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は比較的小さい。周辺点P3に関する4極状の瞳強度分布のうち、面光源33cに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は比較的小さく、面光源33dに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は最も大きい。 Further, as shown in FIG. 33, when the second substrate 192 moves from the reference state by a predetermined distance in the −Z direction and the third substrate 193 moves from the reference state by a predetermined distance in the + Z direction, the center point P1 is related. Of the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution, the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 31c and the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 31d are both relatively large. Of the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral point P2, the light reduction effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32c is the largest, and the light reduction effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32d is relatively small. Of the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral point P3, the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33c is relatively small, and the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33d is the largest.

 また、図34に示すように、第2基板192が基準状態から+Z方向に所定距離だけ移動し且つ第3基板193が基準状態から-Z方向に所定距離だけ移動した状態では、中心点P1に関する4極状の瞳強度分布のうち、面光源31cに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用および面光源31dに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用はともに比較的大きい。周辺点P2に関する4極状の瞳強度分布のうち、面光源32cに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は比較的小さく、面光源32dに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は最も大きい。周辺点P3に関する4極状の瞳強度分布のうち、面光源33cに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は最も大きく、面光源33dに対する補正ユニット19による減光作用は比較的小さい。 Further, as shown in FIG. 34, when the second substrate 192 moves by a predetermined distance in the + Z direction from the reference state and the third substrate 193 moves by a predetermined distance in the −Z direction from the reference state, the center point P1 is related. Of the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution, the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 31c and the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 31d are both relatively large. Of the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral point P2, the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32c is relatively small, and the dimming effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 32d is the largest. Of the quadrupole pupil intensity distribution related to the peripheral point P3, the light reduction effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33c is the largest, and the light reduction effect by the correction unit 19 on the surface light source 33d is relatively small.

 こうして、例えば第2基板192をZ方向に沿った所要の位置に設定し、且つ第3基板193をZ方向に沿った所要の位置に設定することにより、光軸AXを挟んでZ方向に間隔を隔てた一対の面光源32cと32dとの間および一対の面光源33cと33dとの間に存在する図23および図24に示すような光強度差を調整することができる。 Thus, for example, the second substrate 192 is set at a required position along the Z direction, and the third substrate 193 is set at a required position along the Z direction so that the optical axis AX is sandwiched in the Z direction. The difference in light intensity as shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 existing between the pair of surface light sources 32c and 32d and between the pair of surface light sources 33c and 33d can be adjusted.

 具体的に、補正ユニット19の第2基板192が基準状態から-Z方向に沿って所要距離だけ移動した位置にあり且つ第3基板193が基準状態から+Z方向に沿って所要距離だけ移動した位置にある場合、図35に示すように、周辺点P2に関する瞳強度分布32のうち、面光源32aおよび32bからの光は、補正ユニット19の減光作用を受けないため、その光強度は変化しない。面光源32cからの光は、補正ユニット19の減光作用を受けて、その光強度は比較的大きく低下する。面光源32dからの光は、補正ユニット19の減光作用を受けても、その光強度の低下は比較的小さい。その結果、補正ユニット19により調整された周辺点P2に関する瞳強度分布32’において、Z方向に間隔を隔てた面光源32c’の光強度と面光源32d’の光強度とはほぼ等しくなる。あるいは、面光源32c’の光強度と面光源32d’の光強度との差が、所要の光強度差に調整される。 Specifically, the second substrate 192 of the correction unit 19 is at a position moved from the reference state by a required distance along the −Z direction, and the third substrate 193 is moved from the reference state by a required distance along the + Z direction. 35, in the pupil intensity distribution 32 related to the peripheral point P2, the light from the surface light sources 32a and 32b is not affected by the dimming action of the correction unit 19, so that the light intensity does not change as shown in FIG. . The light from the surface light source 32c is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 19, and its light intensity is relatively greatly reduced. Even if the light from the surface light source 32d is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 19, the decrease in the light intensity is relatively small. As a result, in the pupil intensity distribution 32 ′ relating to the peripheral point P <b> 2 adjusted by the correction unit 19, the light intensity of the surface light source 32 c ′ spaced apart in the Z direction is approximately equal to the light intensity of the surface light source 32 d ′. Alternatively, the difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 32c 'and the light intensity of the surface light source 32d' is adjusted to a required light intensity difference.

 また、図36に示すように、周辺点P3に関する瞳強度分布33のうち、面光源33aおよび33bからの光は、補正ユニット19の減光作用を受けないため、その光強度は変化しない。面光源33cからの光は、補正ユニット19の減光作用を受けても、その光強度の低下は比較的小さい。面光源33dからの光は、補正ユニット19の減光作用を受けて、その光強度は比較的大きく低下する。その結果、補正ユニット19により調整された周辺点P3に関する瞳強度分布33’において、Z方向に間隔を隔てた面光源33c’の光強度と面光源33d’の光強度とはほぼ等しくなる。あるいは、面光源33c’の光強度と面光源33d’の光強度との差が、所要の光強度差に調整される。 Further, as shown in FIG. 36, in the pupil intensity distribution 33 related to the peripheral point P3, the light from the surface light sources 33a and 33b is not affected by the dimming action of the correction unit 19, and therefore the light intensity does not change. Even if the light from the surface light source 33c is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 19, the decrease in the light intensity is relatively small. The light from the surface light source 33d is subjected to the dimming action of the correction unit 19, and its light intensity is relatively reduced. As a result, in the pupil intensity distribution 33 ′ related to the peripheral point P <b> 3 adjusted by the correction unit 19, the light intensity of the surface light source 33 c ′ spaced apart in the Z direction is approximately equal to the light intensity of the surface light source 33 d ′. Alternatively, the difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 33c 'and the light intensity of the surface light source 33d' is adjusted to a required light intensity difference.

 なお、面光源32c’の光強度と面光源32d’の光強度との差および面光源33c’の光強度と面光源33d’の光強度との差を所要の光強度差に調整する動作は、例えば投影光学系PLを介した光に基づいて投影光学系PLの瞳面における瞳強度分布を計測する瞳強度分布計測装置(不図示)の計測結果に基づいて行われる。具体的に、瞳強度分布計測装置の計測結果は、制御部(不図示)に供給される。制御部は、瞳強度分布計測装置の計測結果に基づいて、投影光学系PLの瞳面における瞳強度分布が所望の分布になるように、補正ユニット19の駆動制御系194に指令を出力する。駆動制御系194は、制御部からの指令に基づいて第2基板192および第3基板193のZ方向位置を制御し、面光源32c’の光強度と面光源32d’の光強度との差および面光源33c’の光強度と面光源33d’の光強度との差を所要の光強度差に調整する。 The operation of adjusting the difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 32c ′ and the light intensity of the surface light source 32d ′ and the difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 33c ′ and the light intensity of the surface light source 33d ′ to a required light intensity difference is as follows. For example, the measurement is performed based on the measurement result of a pupil intensity distribution measuring device (not shown) that measures the pupil intensity distribution on the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL based on light via the projection optical system PL. Specifically, the measurement result of the pupil intensity distribution measuring device is supplied to a control unit (not shown). The control unit outputs a command to the drive control system 194 of the correction unit 19 so that the pupil intensity distribution on the pupil plane of the projection optical system PL becomes a desired distribution based on the measurement result of the pupil intensity distribution measuring device. The drive control system 194 controls the position of the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 in the Z direction based on a command from the control unit, and the difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 32c ′ and the light intensity of the surface light source 32d ′ and The difference between the light intensity of the surface light source 33c ′ and the light intensity of the surface light source 33d ′ is adjusted to a required light intensity difference.

 以上のように、第2実施形態の補正ユニット19では、射出面に遮光ドット151が形成された第1基板191に対して、入射面に遮光ドット152および153が形成された第2基板192および第3基板193が、単位波面分割面の長辺方向であるZ方向に沿ってそれぞれ相対移動可能に構成されている。したがって、補正ユニット19は、図32~図34を参照して明らかなように、静止露光領域ER内のY方向(照明瞳におけるZ方向に対応)に沿って減光率が様々な態様にしたがって変化する多様な減光率特性を実現する。なお、上述の説明では、基板191の一対の遮光性ドット151、基板192の1つの遮光性ドット152、および基板193の1つの遮光性ドット153だけに着目しているが、これらの遮光性ドット151~153がそれぞれ分布形成されている場合にも、補正ユニット19が上述の作用と同様の作用を奏することは明らかである。 As described above, in the correction unit 19 of the second embodiment, the second substrate 192 having the light-shielding dots 152 and 153 formed on the incident surface is different from the first substrate 191 having the light-shielding dots 151 formed on the exit surface. The third substrate 193 is configured to be relatively movable along the Z direction, which is the long side direction of the unit wavefront dividing surface. Accordingly, as is apparent with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34, the correction unit 19 has a dimming rate according to various modes along the Y direction (corresponding to the Z direction in the illumination pupil) in the still exposure region ER. Realizes various dimming rate characteristics that change. In the above description, attention is paid only to the pair of light shielding dots 151 on the substrate 191, one light shielding dot 152 on the substrate 192, and one light shielding dot 153 on the substrate 193. Obviously, the correction unit 19 exhibits the same operation as described above even when the distributions 151 to 153 are distributed.

 したがって、第2実施形態の照明光学系(2~12)では、補正ユニット19の多様な減光作用により、静止露光領域ER内の各点に関する瞳強度分布において光軸AXを挟んでY方向に間隔を隔てた一対の領域の間(図23および図24の例では一対の面光源32cと32dとの間および一対の面光源33cと33dとの間)の光強度の差を調整することができる。また、第2実施形態の露光装置(2~WS)では、ウェハW上の静止露光領域ER内の各点に関する瞳強度分布において光軸AXを挟んでY方向に間隔を隔てた一対の領域の光強度差を調整する照明光学系(2~12)を用いて、マスクMの微細パターンに応じた適切な照明条件のもとで良好な露光を行うことができ、ひいてはマスクMの微細パターンを露光領域の全体に亘って所望の位置に所望の線幅でウェハW上に忠実に転写することができる。 Therefore, in the illumination optical system (2 to 12) of the second embodiment, the dimming action of the correction unit 19 causes the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the still exposure region ER to be in the Y direction across the optical axis AX. It is possible to adjust the difference in light intensity between a pair of spaced regions (in the example of FIGS. 23 and 24, between the pair of surface light sources 32c and 32d and between the pair of surface light sources 33c and 33d). it can. In the exposure apparatus (2 to WS) of the second embodiment, a pair of regions spaced apart in the Y direction across the optical axis AX in the pupil intensity distribution for each point in the static exposure region ER on the wafer W. Using the illumination optical system (2 to 12) that adjusts the difference in light intensity, it is possible to perform good exposure under appropriate illumination conditions according to the fine pattern of the mask M. As a result, the fine pattern of the mask M can be formed. The entire exposure area can be faithfully transferred onto the wafer W at a desired position and with a desired line width.

 第2実施形態において、ウェハ(被照射面)W上の光量分布が、例えば補正ユニット19の減光作用(調整作用)の影響を受けることが考えられる。この場合、必要に応じて、公知の構成を有する光量分布調整部の作用により、静止露光領域ER内の照度分布または静止露光領域(照明領域)ERの形状を変更することができる。 In the second embodiment, it is conceivable that the light amount distribution on the wafer (irradiated surface) W is affected by, for example, the dimming action (adjusting action) of the correction unit 19. In this case, the illuminance distribution in the still exposure region ER or the shape of the still exposure region (illumination region) ER can be changed as necessary by the action of the light quantity distribution adjusting unit having a known configuration.

 なお、上述の第2実施形態では、図25~図27に示す特定の形態にしたがって、光軸AXに対して垂直に配置された平行平面板の形態を有する3つの基板191~193により補正ユニット19を構成している。そして、第1基板191の射出面には、第1減光パターンとしての円形状の遮光性ドット151が分布形成されている。また、第2基板192の入射面および第3基板193の入射面には、第2減光パターンとしての円形状の遮光性ドット152および第3減光パターンとしての円形状の遮光性ドット153が分布形成されている。しかしながら、これに限定されることなく、補正ユニット19の具体的な構成については、様々な形態が可能である。 In the second embodiment described above, the correction unit is constituted by three substrates 191 to 193 having the form of parallel plane plates arranged perpendicular to the optical axis AX according to the specific form shown in FIGS. 19 is constituted. Then, circular light-shielding dots 151 serving as a first dimming pattern are distributed and formed on the emission surface of the first substrate 191. On the incident surface of the second substrate 192 and the incident surface of the third substrate 193, a circular light-shielding dot 152 as a second dimming pattern and a circular light-shielding dot 153 as a third dimming pattern are provided. Distribution is formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various configurations are possible for the specific configuration of the correction unit 19.

 例えば、補正ユニット19を構成する基板の数、基板の形態(外形形状など)、基板の姿勢、基板同士の相対移動の方向、各減光パターンを形成する単位減光領域の数、単位減光領域の形状、単位減光領域の形成面の位置(入射面または射出面)、単位減光領域の分布の形態、補正ユニット19の配置位置などについて、様々な形態が可能である。具体的には、第2基板192と第3基板193とを一体化したり、第1基板191をZ方向に沿って移動可能に構成したり、第2基板192および第3基板193のいずれか一方の設置を省略したりしても、上述の第2実施形態と同様の効果を発揮することができる。また、光透過性の基板として、例えば少なくとも一方の面が曲率を有するような基板を用いることもできる。 For example, the number of substrates constituting the correction unit 19, the form of the substrate (outer shape, etc.), the posture of the substrate, the direction of relative movement between the substrates, the number of unit dimming areas forming each dimming pattern, and unit dimming Various forms are possible with respect to the shape of the region, the position of the formation surface of the unit dimming region (incident surface or exit surface), the distribution form of the unit dimming region, the arrangement position of the correction unit 19, and the like. Specifically, the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 are integrated, the first substrate 191 is configured to be movable along the Z direction, or one of the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 Even if the installation of is omitted, the same effect as in the second embodiment described above can be exhibited. Further, as the light transmissive substrate, for example, a substrate in which at least one surface has a curvature can be used.

 また、上述の第2実施形態では、マイクロフライアイレンズ8の後側焦点面またはその近傍の照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布30の形成面よりも後側(マスク側)に、補正ユニット19を配置している。しかしながら、これに限定されることなく、瞳強度分布30の形成面の位置、またはその前側(光源側)に、補正ユニット19を配置することもできる。また、マイクロフライアイレンズ8よりも後側の別の照明瞳の位置またはその近傍、例えば結像光学系12の前側レンズ群12aと後側レンズ群12bとの間の照明瞳の位置またはその近傍に、補正ユニット19を配置することもできる。 In the second embodiment described above, the correction unit 19 is located behind (on the mask side) the formation surface of the pupil intensity distribution 30 formed on the rear focal plane of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or the illumination pupil in the vicinity thereof. Is arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correction unit 19 can also be arranged at the position of the formation surface of the pupil intensity distribution 30 or the front side (light source side) thereof. Further, the position of the illumination pupil on the rear side of the micro fly's eye lens 8 or the vicinity thereof, for example, the position of the illumination pupil between the front lens group 12a and the rear lens group 12b of the imaging optical system 12 or the vicinity thereof. In addition, the correction unit 19 can be arranged.

 一般的に、照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布を補正する本発明の第3形態にかかる補正ユニットは、照明瞳の前側に隣接するパワーを有する光学素子と当該照明瞳の後側に隣接するパワーを有する光学素子との間の照明瞳空間に配置されて光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第1基板と、照明瞳空間において第1基板よりも後側に配置されて光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第2基板とを備えている。第1基板には少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域を有する第1減光パターンが形成され、第2基板には第1単位減光領域に対応して形成された少なくとも1つの第2単位減光領域を有する第2減光パターンが形成されている。そして、第1基板と第2基板とは、光軸を横切る第1方向に沿って相対移動可能に構成されている。なお、「照明瞳空間」内には、パワーを持たない平行平面板や平面鏡が存在していても良い。 In general, a correction unit according to the third embodiment of the present invention for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil is adjacent to the optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and the rear side of the illumination pupil. A light-transmissive first substrate disposed in an illumination pupil space between the optical elements having power and having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis; and disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space. And a light transmissive second substrate having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis. A first dimming pattern having at least one first unit dimming region is formed on the first substrate, and at least one second unit dimming formed corresponding to the first unit dimming region is formed on the second substrate. A second dimming pattern having a light region is formed. The first substrate and the second substrate are configured to be relatively movable along a first direction that crosses the optical axis. In the “illumination pupil space”, there may be a parallel plane plate or a plane mirror having no power.

 また、上述の第2実施形態では、基板の減光パターンを形成する単位減光領域が、例えばクロムや酸化クロム等からなる遮光性ドットにより、入射光を遮る遮光領域として形成されている。しかしながら、これに限定されることなく、単位減光領域については、遮光領域の形態以外の形態も可能である。例えば、複数の減光パターンのうちの少なくとも一方を、入射光を散乱させる散乱領域として、あるいは入射光を回折させる回折領域として形成することも可能である。一般に、光透過性の基板の所要領域に粗面化加工を施すことにより散乱領域が形成され、所要領域に回折面形成加工を施すことにより回折領域が形成される。 In the second embodiment described above, the unit dimming area for forming the dimming pattern of the substrate is formed as a light blocking area that blocks incident light by a light blocking dot made of, for example, chromium or chromium oxide. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the unit dimming area may have a form other than the form of the light shielding area. For example, at least one of the plurality of dimming patterns can be formed as a scattering region for scattering incident light or as a diffraction region for diffracting incident light. Generally, a scattering region is formed by roughening a required region of a light-transmitting substrate, and a diffraction region is formed by applying a diffractive surface forming process to the required region.

 また、上述の第2実施形態では、第1基板191に対して第2基板192および第3基板193がそれぞれ相対移動可能に構成されている。しかしながら、これに限定されることなく、すべての基板191~193をそれぞれ固定的に設置してもよい。この場合、第1基板191の第1単位減光領域(遮光性ドット151に対応)の一部と第2基板192の第2単位減光領域(遮光性ドット152に対応)の一部とが光軸AX方向から見て重なり合い、且つ第1基板191の第1単位減光領域の一部と第3基板193の第3単位減光領域(遮光性ドット153に対応)の一部とが光軸AX方向から見て重なり合う状態で、各基板191~193が固定的に位置決めされていることが重要である。 In the second embodiment described above, the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 are configured to be movable relative to the first substrate 191, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all the substrates 191 to 193 may be fixedly installed. In this case, a part of the first unit dimming region (corresponding to the light shielding dot 151) of the first substrate 191 and a part of the second unit light reducing region (corresponding to the light shielding dot 152) of the second substrate 192 are formed. A portion of the first unit attenuation region of the first substrate 191 and a part of the third unit attenuation region (corresponding to the light shielding dot 153) of the third substrate 193 overlap with each other when viewed from the optical axis AX direction. It is important that the substrates 191 to 193 are fixedly positioned so as to overlap when viewed from the axis AX direction.

 具体的に、上述の第2実施形態に対応する構成では、第1単位減光領域と第2単位減光領域とがZ方向に位置ずれし且つ第1単位減光領域と第3単位減光領域とがZ方向に位置ずれした状態で、各基板191~193が固定的に位置決めされる。各基板を固定的に位置決めする構成においても、第2基板192と第3基板193とを一体化したり、第2基板192および第3基板193のいずれか一方の設置を省略したりすることができる。 Specifically, in the configuration corresponding to the above-described second embodiment, the first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region are displaced in the Z direction, and the first unit dimming region and the third unit dimming are included. Each substrate 191 to 193 is fixedly positioned in a state where the region is displaced in the Z direction. Even in the configuration in which each substrate is fixedly positioned, the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 can be integrated, or the installation of one of the second substrate 192 and the third substrate 193 can be omitted. .

 つまり、一般的には、各基板を固定的に位置決めする構成にしたがう本発明の第2形態にかかる補正ユニットは、照明瞳空間において光軸に垂直な第1面に形成された第1減光パターンと、照明瞳空間において第1面よりも後側に位置決めされて第1面と平行な第2面に形成された第2減光パターンとを備えている。第1減光パターンは少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域を有し、第2減光パターンは第1単位減光領域に対応して形成された少なくとも1つの第2単位減光領域を有する。そして、第1単位減光領域の一部と第2単位減光領域の一部とが光軸方向から見て重なり合っている。 That is, in general, the correction unit according to the second embodiment of the present invention according to the configuration in which the respective substrates are fixedly positioned has the first dimming formed on the first surface perpendicular to the optical axis in the illumination pupil space. And a second dimming pattern that is positioned on the rear side of the first surface in the illumination pupil space and formed on a second surface parallel to the first surface. The first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming area, and the second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming area formed corresponding to the first unit dimming area. A part of the first unit dimming region and a part of the second unit dimming region overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis direction.

 また、第1実施形態および第2実施形態を参照すると、本発明の第4形態にかかる補正ユニットは、照明瞳空間に配置されて光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第1基板と、照明瞳空間において第1基板よりも後側に配置されて光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第2基板とを備え、第1基板は光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第1減光パターンを有し、第2基板は光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第2減光パターンを有する。第1減光パターンは少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域を有し、第2減光パターンは、少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域に対応して形成された少なくとも1つの第2単位減光領域を有する。そして、第1単位減光領域と第2単位減光領域とは、第1単位減光領域に第1の入射角で入射する光に対して第1の減光率を与え、且つ第1単位減光領域に第1の入射角とは異なる第2の入射角で入射する光に対して第1の減光率とは異なる第2の減光率を与え、第1基板と第2基板との位置関係は変更可能である。 Further, referring to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the correction unit according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention is arranged in the illumination pupil space and has a light transmission property having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis. And a light-transmissive second substrate that is disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space and has a predetermined thickness along the optical axis, and the first substrate is located on the light incident side. And a second substrate having at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface. A second dimming pattern formed on the surface. The first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming area, and the second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming formed corresponding to the at least one first unit dimming area. Has a region. The first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region provide a first dimming rate for light incident on the first unit dimming region at a first incident angle, and the first unit dimming region A second dimming rate different from the first dimming rate is given to light incident at a second incident angle different from the first incident angle to the dimming region, and the first substrate and the second substrate The positional relationship of can be changed.

 なお、上述の説明では、照明瞳に4極状の瞳強度分布が形成される変形照明、すなわち4極照明を例にとって、本発明の作用効果を説明している。しかしながら、4極照明に限定されることなく、例えば輪帯状の瞳強度分布が形成される輪帯照明、4極状以外の他の複数極状の瞳強度分布が形成される複数極照明などに対しても、同様に本発明を適用して同様の作用効果を得ることができることは明らかである。 In the above description, the operational effects of the present invention are described by taking, as an example, modified illumination in which a quadrupole pupil intensity distribution is formed on the illumination pupil, that is, quadrupole illumination. However, the present invention is not limited to quadrupole illumination. For example, annular illumination in which an annular pupil intensity distribution is formed, multipolar illumination in which a multipolar pupil intensity distribution other than quadrupole is formed, and the like. In contrast, it is apparent that the same effects can be obtained by applying the present invention.

 上述の実施形態では、マスクの代わりに、所定の電子データに基づいて所定パターンを形成する可変パターン形成装置を用いることができる。このような可変パターン形成装置を用いれば、パターン面が縦置きでも同期精度に及ぼす影響を最低限にできる。なお、可変パターン形成装置としては、たとえば所定の電子データに基づいて駆動される複数の反射素子を含むDMD(デジタル・マイクロミラー・デバイス)を用いることができる。DMDを用いた露光装置は、例えば特開2004-304135号公報、国際特許公開第2006/080285号パンフレットおよびこれに対応する米国特許公開第2007/0296936号公報に開示されている。また、DMDのような非発光型の反射型空間光変調器以外に、透過型空間光変調器を用いても良く、自発光型の画像表示素子を用いても良い。なお、パターン面が横置きの場合であっても可変パターン形成装置を用いても良い。ここでは、米国特許公開第2007/0296936号公報の教示を参照として援用する。 In the above-described embodiment, a variable pattern forming apparatus that forms a predetermined pattern based on predetermined electronic data can be used instead of a mask. By using such a variable pattern forming apparatus, the influence on the synchronization accuracy can be minimized even if the pattern surface is placed vertically. As the variable pattern forming apparatus, for example, a DMD (digital micromirror device) including a plurality of reflecting elements driven based on predetermined electronic data can be used. An exposure apparatus using DMD is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-304135, pamphlet of International Patent Publication No. 2006/080285 and US Patent Publication No. 2007/0296936 corresponding thereto. In addition to a non-light-emitting reflective spatial light modulator such as DMD, a transmissive spatial light modulator may be used, or a self-luminous image display element may be used. Note that a variable pattern forming apparatus may be used even when the pattern surface is placed horizontally. Here, the teachings of US Patent Publication No. 2007/0296936 are incorporated by reference.

 また、上述の実施形態では、オプティカルインテグレータとして、マイクロフライアイレンズ8を用いているが、その代わりに、内面反射型のオプティカルインテグレータ(典型的にはロッド型インテグレータ)を用いても良い。この場合、ズームレンズ7の後側にその前側焦点位置がズームレンズ7の後側焦点位置と一致するように集光レンズを配置し、この集光レンズの後側焦点位置またはその近傍に入射端が位置決めされるようにロッド型インテグレータを配置する。このとき、ロッド型インテグレータの射出端が照明視野絞り11の位置になる。ロッド型インテグレータを用いる場合、このロッド型インテグレータの下流の視野絞り結像光学系12内の、投影光学系PLの開口絞りASの位置と光学的に共役な位置を照明瞳面と呼ぶことができる。また、ロッド型インテグレータの入射面の位置には、照明瞳面の二次光源の虚像が形成されることになるため、この位置およびこの位置と光学的に共役な位置も照明瞳面と呼ぶことができる。ここで、ズームレンズ7、上記の集光レンズおよびロッド型インテグレータを分布形成光学系とみなすことができる。 In the above-described embodiment, the micro fly's eye lens 8 is used as the optical integrator, but instead, an internal reflection type optical integrator (typically a rod type integrator) may be used. In this case, the condensing lens is arranged on the rear side of the zoom lens 7 so that the front focal position thereof coincides with the rear focal position of the zoom lens 7, and the incident end is located at or near the rear focal position of the condensing lens. Position the rod-type integrator so that is positioned. At this time, the exit end of the rod integrator is the position of the illumination field stop 11. When a rod type integrator is used, a position optically conjugate with the position of the aperture stop AS of the projection optical system PL in the field stop imaging optical system 12 downstream of the rod type integrator can be called an illumination pupil plane. . In addition, since a virtual image of the secondary light source of the illumination pupil plane is formed at the position of the entrance surface of the rod integrator, this position and a position optically conjugate with this position are also called the illumination pupil plane. Can do. Here, the zoom lens 7, the above-described condenser lens, and the rod integrator can be regarded as a distribution forming optical system.

 また、上述の実施形態において、回折光学素子3に代えて、或いは加えて、たとえばアレイ状に配列され且つ傾斜角および傾斜方向が個別に駆動制御される多数の微小な要素ミラーにより構成されて入射光束を反射面毎の微小単位に分割して偏向させることにより、光束の断面を所望の形状または所望の大きさに変換する空間光変調素子を用いても良い。このような空間光変調素子を用いた照明光学系は、例えば特開2002-353105号公報に開示されている。 Further, in the above-described embodiment, instead of or in addition to the diffractive optical element 3, for example, it is constituted by a large number of minute element mirrors arranged in an array and whose tilt angle and tilt direction are individually driven and controlled. A spatial light modulation element that converts the cross section of the light beam into a desired shape or a desired size by dividing the light beam into small units for each reflecting surface and deflecting the light beam may be used. An illumination optical system using such a spatial light modulator is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-353105.

 上述の実施形態の露光装置は、本願特許請求の範囲に挙げられた各構成要素を含む各種サブシステムを、所定の機械的精度、電気的精度、光学的精度を保つように、組み立てることで製造される。これら各種精度を確保するために、この組み立ての前後には、各種光学系については光学的精度を達成するための調整、各種機械系については機械的精度を達成するための調整、各種電気系については電気的精度を達成するための調整が行われる。各種サブシステムから露光装置への組み立て工程は、各種サブシステム相互の、機械的接続、電気回路の配線接続、気圧回路の配管接続等が含まれる。この各種サブシステムから露光装置への組み立て工程の前に、各サブシステム個々の組み立て工程があることはいうまでもない。各種サブシステムの露光装置への組み立て工程が終了したら、総合調整が行われ、露光装置全体としての各種精度が確保される。なお、露光装置の製造は温度およびクリーン度等が管理されたクリーンルームで行うことが望ましい。 The exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment is manufactured by assembling various subsystems including the respective constituent elements recited in the claims of the present application so as to maintain predetermined mechanical accuracy, electrical accuracy, and optical accuracy. Is done. In order to ensure these various accuracies, before and after assembly, various optical systems are adjusted to achieve optical accuracy, various mechanical systems are adjusted to achieve mechanical accuracy, and various electrical systems are Adjustments are made to achieve electrical accuracy. The assembly process from the various subsystems to the exposure apparatus includes mechanical connection, electrical circuit wiring connection, pneumatic circuit piping connection and the like between the various subsystems. Needless to say, there is an assembly process for each subsystem before the assembly process from the various subsystems to the exposure apparatus. When the assembly process of the various subsystems to the exposure apparatus is completed, comprehensive adjustment is performed to ensure various accuracies as the entire exposure apparatus. The exposure apparatus is preferably manufactured in a clean room where the temperature, cleanliness, etc. are controlled.

 次に、上述の実施形態にかかる露光装置を用いたデバイス製造方法について説明する。図37は、半導体デバイスの製造工程を示すフローチャートである。図37に示すように、半導体デバイスの製造工程では、半導体デバイスの基板となるウェハWに金属膜を蒸着し(ステップS40)、この蒸着した金属膜上に感光性材料であるフォトレジストを塗布する(ステップS42)。つづいて、上述の実施形態の露光装置を用い、マスク(レチクル)Mに形成されたパターンをウェハW上の各ショット領域に転写し(ステップS44:露光工程)、この転写が終了したウェハWの現像、つまりパターンが転写されたフォトレジストの現像を行う(ステップS46:現像工程)。その後、ステップS46によってウェハWの表面に生成されたレジストパターンをマスクとし、ウェハWの表面に対してエッチング等の加工を行う(ステップS48:加工工程)。 Next, a device manufacturing method using the exposure apparatus according to the above-described embodiment will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing manufacturing steps of a semiconductor device. As shown in FIG. 37, in the semiconductor device manufacturing process, a metal film is vapor-deposited on a wafer W to be a semiconductor device substrate (step S40), and a photoresist, which is a photosensitive material, is applied on the vapor-deposited metal film. (Step S42). Subsequently, using the exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment, the pattern formed on the mask (reticle) M is transferred to each shot area on the wafer W (step S44: exposure process), and the transfer of the wafer W after the transfer is completed. Development, that is, development of the photoresist to which the pattern has been transferred is performed (step S46: development process). Thereafter, using the resist pattern generated on the surface of the wafer W in step S46 as a mask, processing such as etching is performed on the surface of the wafer W (step S48: processing step).

 ここで、レジストパターンとは、上述の実施形態の露光装置によって転写されたパターンに対応する形状の凹凸が生成されたフォトレジスト層であって、その凹部がフォトレジスト層を貫通しているものである。ステップS48では、このレジストパターンを介してウェハWの表面の加工を行う。ステップS48で行われる加工には、例えばウェハWの表面のエッチングまたは金属膜等の成膜の少なくとも一方が含まれる。なお、ステップS44では、上述の実施形態の露光装置は、フォトレジストが塗布されたウェハWを、感光性基板つまりプレートPとしてパターンの転写を行う。 Here, the resist pattern is a photoresist layer in which unevenness having a shape corresponding to the pattern transferred by the exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment is generated, and the recess penetrates the photoresist layer. is there. In step S48, the surface of the wafer W is processed through this resist pattern. The processing performed in step S48 includes, for example, at least one of etching of the surface of the wafer W or film formation of a metal film or the like. In step S44, the exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment performs pattern transfer using the wafer W coated with the photoresist as the photosensitive substrate, that is, the plate P.

 図38は、液晶表示素子等の液晶デバイスの製造工程を示すフローチャートである。図38に示すように、液晶デバイスの製造工程では、パターン形成工程(ステップS50)、カラーフィルター形成工程(ステップS52)、セル組立工程(ステップS54)およびモジュール組立工程(ステップS56)を順次行う。 FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a manufacturing process of a liquid crystal device such as a liquid crystal display element. As shown in FIG. 38, in the liquid crystal device manufacturing process, a pattern forming process (step S50), a color filter forming process (step S52), a cell assembling process (step S54), and a module assembling process (step S56) are sequentially performed.

 ステップS50のパターン形成工程では、プレートPとしてフォトレジストが塗布されたガラス基板上に、上述の実施形態の露光装置を用いて回路パターンおよび電極パターン等の所定のパターンを形成する。このパターン形成工程には、上述の実施形態の露光装置を用いてフォトレジスト層にパターンを転写する露光工程と、パターンが転写されたプレートPの現像、つまりガラス基板上のフォトレジスト層の現像を行い、パターンに対応する形状のフォトレジスト層を生成する現像工程と、この現像されたフォトレジスト層を介してガラス基板の表面を加工する加工工程とが含まれている。 In the pattern forming process of step S50, a predetermined pattern such as a circuit pattern and an electrode pattern is formed on the glass substrate coated with a photoresist as the plate P using the exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment. In this pattern formation process, an exposure process for transferring the pattern to the photoresist layer using the exposure apparatus of the above-described embodiment and development of the plate P to which the pattern is transferred, that is, development of the photoresist layer on the glass substrate are performed. And a developing step for generating a photoresist layer having a shape corresponding to the pattern, and a processing step for processing the surface of the glass substrate through the developed photoresist layer.

 ステップS52のカラーフィルター形成工程では、R(Red)、G(Green)、B(Blue)に対応する3つのドットの組をマトリックス状に多数配列するか、またはR、G、Bの3本のストライプのフィルターの組を水平走査方向に複数配列したカラーフィルターを形成する。 In the color filter forming step of step S52, a large number of sets of three dots corresponding to R (Red), G (Green), and B (Blue) are arranged in a matrix or three R, G, and B A color filter is formed by arranging a plurality of stripe filter sets in the horizontal scanning direction.

 ステップS54のセル組立工程では、ステップS50によって所定パターンが形成されたガラス基板と、ステップS52によって形成されたカラーフィルターとを用いて液晶パネル(液晶セル)を組み立てる。具体的には、例えばガラス基板とカラーフィルターとの間に液晶を注入することで液晶パネルを形成する。ステップS56のモジュール組立工程では、ステップS54によって組み立てられた液晶パネルに対し、この液晶パネルの表示動作を行わせる電気回路およびバックライト等の各種部品を取り付ける。 In the cell assembly process in step S54, a liquid crystal panel (liquid crystal cell) is assembled using the glass substrate on which the predetermined pattern is formed in step S50 and the color filter formed in step S52. Specifically, for example, a liquid crystal panel is formed by injecting liquid crystal between a glass substrate and a color filter. In the module assembling process in step S56, various components such as an electric circuit and a backlight for performing the display operation of the liquid crystal panel are attached to the liquid crystal panel assembled in step S54.

 また、本発明は、半導体デバイス製造用の露光装置への適用に限定されることなく、例えば、角型のガラスプレートに形成される液晶表示素子、若しくはプラズマディスプレイ等のディスプレイ装置用の露光装置や、撮像素子(CCD等)、マイクロマシーン、薄膜磁気ヘッド、及びDNAチップ等の各種デバイスを製造するための露光装置にも広く適用できる。更に、本発明は、各種デバイスのマスクパターンが形成されたマスク(フォトマスク、レチクル等)をフォトリソグラフィ工程を用いて製造する際の、露光工程(露光装置)にも適用することができる。 In addition, the present invention is not limited to application to an exposure apparatus for manufacturing a semiconductor device, for example, an exposure apparatus for a display device such as a liquid crystal display element formed on a square glass plate or a plasma display, It can also be widely applied to an exposure apparatus for manufacturing various devices such as an image sensor (CCD or the like), a micromachine, a thin film magnetic head, and a DNA chip. Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to an exposure process (exposure apparatus) when manufacturing a mask (photomask, reticle, etc.) on which mask patterns of various devices are formed using a photolithography process.

 なお、上述の実施形態では、露光光としてArFエキシマレーザ光(波長:193nm)やKrFエキシマレーザ光(波長:248nm)を用いているが、これに限定されることなく、他の適当なレーザ光源、たとえば波長157nmのレーザ光を供給するF2レーザ光源などに対して本発明を適用することもできる。 In the above-described embodiment, ArF excimer laser light (wavelength: 193 nm) or KrF excimer laser light (wavelength: 248 nm) is used as the exposure light. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other suitable laser light sources. For example, the present invention can also be applied to an F 2 laser light source that supplies laser light having a wavelength of 157 nm.

 また、上述の実施形態において、投影光学系と感光性基板との間の光路中を1.1よりも大きな屈折率を有する媒体(典型的には液体)で満たす手法、所謂液浸法を適用しても良い。この場合、投影光学系と感光性基板との間の光路中に液体を満たす手法としては、国際公開第WO99/49504号パンフレットに開示されているような局所的に液体を満たす手法や、特開平6-124873号公報に開示されているような露光対象の基板を保持したステージを液槽の中で移動させる手法や、特開平10-303114号公報に開示されているようなステージ上に所定深さの液体槽を形成し、その中に基板を保持する手法などを採用することができる。ここでは、国際公開第WO99/49504号パンフレット、特開平6-124873号公報および特開平10-303114号公報の教示を参照として援用する。 In the above-described embodiment, a so-called immersion method is applied in which the optical path between the projection optical system and the photosensitive substrate is filled with a medium (typically liquid) having a refractive index larger than 1.1. You may do it. In this case, as a method for filling the liquid in the optical path between the projection optical system and the photosensitive substrate, a method for locally filling the liquid as disclosed in International Publication No. WO 99/49504, A method of moving a stage holding a substrate to be exposed as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 6-124873 in a liquid bath, or a stage having a predetermined depth on a stage as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-303114. A technique of forming a liquid tank and holding the substrate in the liquid tank can be employed. Here, the teachings of WO99 / 49504, JP-A-6-124873 and JP-A-10-303114 are incorporated by reference.

 また、上述の実施形態において、米国公開公報第2006/0170901号及び第2007/0146676号に開示されるいわゆる偏光照明方法を適用することも可能である。ここでは、米国特許公開第2006/0170901号公報及び米国特許公開第2007/0146676号公報の教示を参照として援用する。 In the above-described embodiment, a so-called polarization illumination method disclosed in US Publication Nos. 2006/0170901 and 2007/0146676 can also be applied. Here, the teachings of US Patent Publication No. 2006/0170901 and US Patent Publication No. 2007/0146676 are incorporated by reference.

 また、上述の実施形態では、ウェハWのショット領域にマスクMのパターンを走査露光するステップ・アンド・スキャン方式の露光装置に対して本発明を適用している。しかしながら、これに限定されることなく、ウェハWの各露光領域にマスクMのパターンを一括露光する動作を繰り返すステップ・アンド・リピート方式の露光装置に対して本発明を適用することもできる。 In the above-described embodiment, the present invention is applied to a step-and-scan type exposure apparatus that scans and exposes the pattern of the mask M on the shot area of the wafer W. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention can also be applied to a step-and-repeat type exposure apparatus that repeats the operation of collectively exposing the pattern of the mask M to each exposure region of the wafer W.

 また、上述の実施形態では、露光装置においてマスク(またはウェハ)を照明する照明光学系に対して本発明を適用しているが、これに限定されることなく、マスク(またはウェハ)以外の被照射面を照明する一般的な照明光学系に対して本発明を適用することもできる。 In the above-described embodiment, the present invention is applied to the illumination optical system that illuminates the mask (or wafer) in the exposure apparatus. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an object other than the mask (or wafer) is used. The present invention can also be applied to a general illumination optical system that illuminates the irradiation surface.

1 光源
3 回折光学素子
4 アフォーカルレンズ
5 濃度フィルター
6 円錐アキシコン系
7 ズームレンズ
8 マイクロフライアイレンズ(オプティカルインテグレータ)
9,19 補正ユニット
91,92,191,192,193 基板
10 コンデンサー光学系
11 マスクブラインド
12 結像光学系
M マスク
MS マスクステージ
PL 投影光学系
AS 開口絞り
W ウェハ
WS ウェハステージ
1 Light Source 3 Diffractive Optical Element 4 Afocal Lens 5 Density Filter 6 Conical Axicon System 7 Zoom Lens 8 Micro Fly Eye Lens (Optical Integrator)
9, 19 Correction unit 91, 92, 191, 192, 193 Substrate 10 Condenser optical system 11 Mask blind 12 Imaging optical system M Mask MS Mask stage PL Projection optical system AS Aperture stop W Wafer WS Wafer stage

Claims (45)

照明光学系の照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布を補正する補正ユニットであって、
 前記照明瞳の前側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子と前記照明瞳の後側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子との間の照明瞳空間に配置されて、前記照明光学系の光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第1基板と、
 前記照明瞳空間において前記第1基板よりも後側に配置されて前記光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第2基板とを備え、
 前記第1基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第1減光パターンを有し、
 前記第2基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に前記第1減光パターンに対応して形成された第2減光パターンを有し、
 前記第1減光パターンと前記第2減光パターンとの相対位置は変更可能であって、
 前記第1基板と前記第2基板との相対位置の変化および前記第1基板への光の入射角度の変化に応じて前記第1減光パターンおよび前記第2減光パターンによる減光率が変化するように構成されていることを特徴とする補正ユニット。
A correction unit for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil of the illumination optical system,
It is arranged in an illumination pupil space between an optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and an optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil, and is arranged on the optical axis of the illumination optical system. A light transmissive first substrate having a predetermined thickness along,
A light transmissive second substrate disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space and having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis;
The first substrate has a first dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The second substrate has a second dimming pattern formed corresponding to the first dimming pattern on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The relative position of the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern can be changed,
The dimming rate due to the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern changes according to a change in the relative position between the first substrate and the second substrate and a change in the incident angle of light on the first substrate. It is comprised so that it may be correct | amended.
前記第1基板および前記第2基板のうちの少なくとも一方は、所定の方向に移動可能または所定軸線廻りに回転可能に構成されていることを特徴とする請求項1に記載の補正ユニット。 2. The correction unit according to claim 1, wherein at least one of the first substrate and the second substrate is configured to be movable in a predetermined direction or rotatable about a predetermined axis. 前記第1基板および前記第2基板のうちの少なくとも一方は前記光軸方向に移動可能に構成され、前記第1減光パターンおよび前記第2減光パターンは前記光軸方向から見て互いに重なり合うように構成されていることを特徴とする請求項2に記載の補正ユニット。 At least one of the first substrate and the second substrate is configured to be movable in the optical axis direction, and the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis direction. The correction unit according to claim 2, wherein the correction unit is configured as follows. 前記第1減光パターンは少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域を有し、前記第2減光パターンは、前記少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域に対応して形成されて前記第1単位減光領域と同じ外形形状および同じ大きさの少なくとも1つの第2単位減光領域を有することを特徴とする請求項3に記載の補正ユニット。 The first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming region, and the second dimming pattern is formed corresponding to the at least one first unit dimming region, and the first unit dimming region is formed. The correction unit according to claim 3, further comprising at least one second unit dimming area having the same outer shape and the same size as the light area. 前記第1基板および前記第2基板のうちの少なくとも一方は前記光軸廻りに回転可能に構成され、前記第1基板と前記第2基板との前記光軸廻りの相対位置の変化に応じて、前記第1減光パターンと前記第2減光パターンとが前記光軸方向から見て重なり合う重複領域の大きさが変化するように構成されていることを特徴とする請求項2に記載の補正ユニット。 At least one of the first substrate and the second substrate is configured to be rotatable around the optical axis, and according to a change in the relative position of the first substrate and the second substrate around the optical axis, The correction unit according to claim 2, wherein the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern are configured so that a size of an overlapping region where the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern overlap as viewed from the optical axis direction is changed. . 前記第1減光パターンは、前記第1基板と前記光軸との交点を中心とした円の周方向に沿って配列された複数の第1単位減光領域を有することを特徴とする請求項5に記載の補正ユニット。 The first dimming pattern includes a plurality of first unit dimming regions arranged along a circumferential direction of a circle centering on an intersection between the first substrate and the optical axis. 5. The correction unit according to 5. 前記複数の第1単位減光領域は、前記円の周方向に沿って等角度配列されていることを特徴とする請求項6に記載の補正ユニット。 The correction unit according to claim 6, wherein the plurality of first unit dimming areas are arranged at an equal angle along a circumferential direction of the circle. 前記第1単位減光領域は、前記円の中心から間隔を隔てて放射状に延びる線状領域を有することを特徴とする請求項7に記載の補正ユニット。 The correction unit according to claim 7, wherein the first unit attenuation region has a linear region extending radially from the center of the circle at an interval. 前記第1基板および前記第2基板のうちの少なくとも一方は前記光軸を横切る方向に移動可能に構成され、前記第1基板と前記第2基板との前記光軸を横切る方向に沿った相対位置の変化に応じて、前記第1減光パターンと前記第2減光パターンとが前記光軸方向から見て重なり合う重複領域の大きさが変化するように構成されていることを特徴とする請求項2に記載の補正ユニット。 At least one of the first substrate and the second substrate is configured to be movable in a direction across the optical axis, and a relative position of the first substrate and the second substrate along the direction across the optical axis. The size of the overlapping region where the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern overlap with each other when viewed from the optical axis direction is changed in accordance with the change of 2. The correction unit according to 2. 前記第1基板および前記第2基板は、平行平面板の形態を有することを特徴とする請求項1乃至9のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。 The correction unit according to claim 1, wherein the first substrate and the second substrate have a form of a plane parallel plate. 前記第1基板と前記第2基板とは互いに平行な状態を維持することを特徴とする請求項10に記載の補正ユニット。 The correction unit according to claim 10, wherein the first substrate and the second substrate maintain a parallel state to each other. 前記第1減光パターンは前記第1基板の前記射出側の面に形成され、前記第2減光パターンは前記第2基板の前記入射側の面に形成されていることを特徴とする請求項1乃至11のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。 The first dimming pattern is formed on the surface on the emission side of the first substrate, and the second dimming pattern is formed on the surface on the incident side of the second substrate. The correction unit according to any one of 1 to 11. 前記第1減光パターンは分布形成された複数の第1単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第2減光パターンは、前記複数の第1単位減光領域に対応して分布形成された複数の第2単位減光領域を有することを特徴とする請求項1乃至12のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。
The first dimming pattern has a plurality of first unit dimming regions formed in a distribution,
The said 2nd light attenuation pattern has a some 2nd unit light attenuation area | region distributedly formed corresponding to the said some 1st unit light attenuation area | region, The any one of Claim 1 thru | or 12 characterized by the above-mentioned. The correction unit described in 1.
前記第1減光パターンおよび前記第2減光パターンのうちの少なくとも一方は、入射光を遮る遮光領域を有することを特徴とする請求項1乃至13のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。 14. The correction unit according to claim 1, wherein at least one of the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern has a light shielding region that blocks incident light. 前記第1減光パターンおよび前記第2減光パターンのうちの少なくとも一方は、入射光を散乱させる散乱領域を有することを特徴とする請求項1乃至14のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。 The correction unit according to claim 1, wherein at least one of the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern includes a scattering region that scatters incident light. 前記第1減光パターンおよび前記第2減光パターンのうちの少なくとも一方は、入射光を回折させる回折領域を有することを特徴とする請求項1乃至15のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。 The correction unit according to claim 1, wherein at least one of the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern includes a diffraction region that diffracts incident light. 照明光学系の照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布を補正する補正ユニットであって、
 前記照明瞳の前側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子と前記照明瞳の後側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子との間の照明瞳空間において前記照明光学系の光軸に垂直な第1面に形成された第1減光パターンと、
 前記照明瞳空間において前記第1面よりも後側に位置決めされて前記第1面と平行な第2面に形成された第2減光パターンとを備え、
 前記第1減光パターンは少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第2減光パターンは、前記少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域に対応して形成された少なくとも1つの第2単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第1単位減光領域の一部と前記第2単位減光領域の一部とが前記光軸方向から見て重なり合っていることを特徴とする補正ユニット。
A correction unit for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil of the illumination optical system,
A first perpendicular to the optical axis of the illumination optical system in an illumination pupil space between an optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and an optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil. A first dimming pattern formed on the surface;
A second dimming pattern formed on a second surface parallel to the first surface and positioned rearward of the first surface in the illumination pupil space;
The first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming region;
The second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming region formed corresponding to the at least one first unit dimming region,
A correction unit, wherein a part of the first unit dimming region and a part of the second unit dimming region overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis direction.
前記第1単位減光領域と前記第2単位減光領域とは互いに同じ外形形状および同じ大きさを有し、前記第1単位減光領域と前記第2単位減光領域とは前記光軸を横切る第1方向に沿って位置ずれしていることを特徴とする請求項17に記載の補正ユニット。 The first unit dimming area and the second unit dimming area have the same outer shape and the same size, and the first unit dimming area and the second unit dimming area have the optical axis. The correction unit according to claim 17, wherein the correction unit is misaligned along a first direction that crosses. 前記照明瞳の前側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子と前記照明瞳の後側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子との間の照明瞳空間に配置されて、前記照明光学系の光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第1基板と、
 前記照明瞳空間において前記第1基板よりも後側に配置されて前記光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第2基板とを備え、
 前記第1減光パターンは、前記第1基板の光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成され、
 前記第2減光パターンは、前記第2基板の光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成されていることを特徴とする請求項17または18に記載の補正ユニット。
It is arranged in an illumination pupil space between an optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and an optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil, and is arranged on the optical axis of the illumination optical system. A light transmissive first substrate having a predetermined thickness along,
A light transmissive second substrate disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space and having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis;
The first dimming pattern is formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface of the first substrate,
19. The second dimming pattern is formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface of the second substrate. Correction unit.
照明光学系の照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布を補正する補正ユニットであって、
 前記照明瞳の前側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子と前記照明瞳の後側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子との間の照明瞳空間に配置されて、前記照明光学系の光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第1基板と、
 前記照明瞳空間において前記第1基板よりも後側に配置されて前記光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第2基板とを備え、
 前記第1基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第1減光パターンを有し、
 前記第2基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第2減光パターンを有し、
 前記第1減光パターンは少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第2減光パターンは、前記少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域に対応して形成された少なくとも1つの第2単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第1基板と前記第2基板とは、前記光軸を横切る第1方向に沿って相対移動可能に構成されていることを特徴とする補正ユニット。
A correction unit for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil of the illumination optical system,
It is arranged in an illumination pupil space between an optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and an optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil, and is arranged on the optical axis of the illumination optical system. A light transmissive first substrate having a predetermined thickness along,
A light transmissive second substrate disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space and having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis;
The first substrate has a first dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The second substrate has a second dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming region;
The second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming region formed corresponding to the at least one first unit dimming region,
The correction unit, wherein the first substrate and the second substrate are configured to be relatively movable along a first direction crossing the optical axis.
前記第1単位減光領域と前記第2単位減光領域とは、互いに同じ外形形状および同じ大きさを有し、
 前記第1基板と前記第2基板とは、前記第1単位減光領域と前記第2単位減光領域とが前記光軸方向から見て互いに重なり合う基準状態を中心として、前記第1単位減光領域の一部と前記第2単位減光領域の一部とが前記光軸方向から見て重なり合う範囲内で相対移動可能に構成されていることを特徴とする請求項20に記載の補正ユニット。
The first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region have the same outer shape and the same size.
The first substrate dimming and the second substrate are centered on a reference state in which the first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis direction. 21. The correction unit according to claim 20, wherein a part of the region and a part of the second unit dimming region are configured to be relatively movable within a range where they overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis direction.
前記第1基板および前記第2基板は、平行平面板の形態を有することを特徴とする請求項19乃至21のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。 The correction unit according to any one of claims 19 to 21, wherein the first substrate and the second substrate have a shape of a plane parallel plate. 前記第1基板と前記第2基板とは互いに平行に配置されていることを特徴とする請求項22に記載の補正ユニット。 The correction unit according to claim 22, wherein the first substrate and the second substrate are arranged in parallel to each other. 前記第1減光パターンは前記第1基板の前記射出側の面に形成され、前記第2減光パターンは前記第2基板の前記入射側の面に形成されていることを特徴とする請求項19乃至23のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。 The first dimming pattern is formed on the surface on the emission side of the first substrate, and the second dimming pattern is formed on the surface on the incident side of the second substrate. The correction unit according to any one of 19 to 23. 前記第1減光パターンは分布形成された複数の第1単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第2減光パターンは、前記複数の第1単位減光領域に対応して分布形成された複数の第2単位減光領域を有することを特徴とする請求項17乃至24のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。
The first dimming pattern has a plurality of first unit dimming regions formed in a distribution,
25. The second dimming pattern includes a plurality of second unit dimming regions distributed in correspondence with the plurality of first unit dimming regions. The correction unit described in 1.
前記第1単位減光領域および前記第2単位減光領域のうちの少なくとも一方は、入射光を遮る遮光領域を有することを特徴とする請求項17乃至25のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。 26. The correction unit according to claim 17, wherein at least one of the first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region has a light blocking region that blocks incident light. . 前記第1単位減光領域および前記第2単位減光領域のうちの少なくとも一方は、入射光を散乱させる散乱領域を有することを特徴とする請求項17乃至26のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。 The correction according to any one of claims 17 to 26, wherein at least one of the first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region has a scattering region for scattering incident light. unit. 前記第1単位減光領域および前記第2単位減光領域のうちの少なくとも一方は、入射光を回折させる回折領域を有することを特徴とする請求項17乃至27のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニット。 The correction according to any one of claims 17 to 27, wherein at least one of the first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region has a diffraction region for diffracting incident light. unit. 照明光学系の照明瞳に形成される瞳強度分布を補正する補正ユニットであって、
 前記照明瞳の前側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子と前記照明瞳の後側に隣接してパワーを有する光学素子との間の照明瞳空間に配置されて、前記照明光学系の光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第1基板と、
 前記照明瞳空間において前記第1基板よりも後側に配置されて前記光軸に沿って所定の厚さを有する光透過性の第2基板とを備え、
 前記第1基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第1減光パターンを有し、
 前記第2基板は、光の入射側の面および光の射出側の面のうちの少なくとも一方の面に形成された第2減光パターンを有し、
 前記第1減光パターンは少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第2減光パターンは、前記少なくとも1つの第1単位減光領域に対応して形成された少なくとも1つの第2単位減光領域を有し、
 前記第1単位減光領域と前記第2単位減光領域とは、前記第1単位減光領域に第1の入射角で入射する光に対して第1の減光率を与え、且つ前記第1単位減光領域に前記第1の入射角とは異なる第2の入射角で入射する光に対して前記第1の減光率とは異なる第2の減光率を与え、
 前記第1基板と前記第2基板との位置関係は、変更可能であることを特徴とする補正ユニット。
A correction unit for correcting the pupil intensity distribution formed on the illumination pupil of the illumination optical system,
It is arranged in an illumination pupil space between an optical element having power adjacent to the front side of the illumination pupil and an optical element having power adjacent to the rear side of the illumination pupil, and is arranged on the optical axis of the illumination optical system. A light transmissive first substrate having a predetermined thickness along,
A light transmissive second substrate disposed behind the first substrate in the illumination pupil space and having a predetermined thickness along the optical axis;
The first substrate has a first dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The second substrate has a second dimming pattern formed on at least one of a light incident side surface and a light emission side surface;
The first dimming pattern has at least one first unit dimming region;
The second dimming pattern has at least one second unit dimming region formed corresponding to the at least one first unit dimming region,
The first unit dimming region and the second unit dimming region give a first dimming rate to light incident on the first unit dimming region at a first incident angle, and Giving a second light attenuation rate different from the first light attenuation rate to light incident at a second incident angle different from the first angle of incidence on the one unit light attenuation region;
The correction unit characterized in that the positional relationship between the first substrate and the second substrate can be changed.
前記第1基板と前記第2基板との相対位置の変化および前記第1基板への光の入射角度の変化に応じて前記第1減光パターンおよび前記第2減光パターンによる減光率が変化するように構成されていることを特徴とする請求項29に記載の補正ユニット。 The dimming rate due to the first dimming pattern and the second dimming pattern changes according to a change in the relative position between the first substrate and the second substrate and a change in the incident angle of light on the first substrate. 30. The correction unit according to claim 29, wherein the correction unit is configured to. 前記第1単位減光領域の一部と前記第2単位減光領域の一部とが前記光軸方向から見て重なり合っていることを特徴とする請求項29に記載の補正ユニット。 30. The correction unit according to claim 29, wherein a part of the first unit dimming area and a part of the second unit dimming area overlap each other when viewed from the optical axis direction. 前記第1基板と前記第2基板とは、前記光軸を横切る第1方向に沿って相対移動可能に構成されていることを特徴とする請求項29に記載の補正ユニット。 30. The correction unit according to claim 29, wherein the first substrate and the second substrate are configured to be relatively movable along a first direction crossing the optical axis. 光源からの光で被照射面を照明する照明光学系において、
 オプティカルインテグレータを有し、該オプティカルインテグレータよりも後側の照明瞳に瞳強度分布を形成する分布形成光学系と、
 前記後側の照明瞳を含む前記照明瞳空間に配置された請求項1乃至32のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニットとを備えていることを特徴とする照明光学系。
In the illumination optical system that illuminates the illuminated surface with light from the light source,
A distribution forming optical system having an optical integrator and forming a pupil intensity distribution in an illumination pupil on the rear side of the optical integrator;
33. An illumination optical system comprising: the correction unit according to claim 1 arranged in the illumination pupil space including the rear illumination pupil.
前記オプティカルインテグレータは所定方向に沿って細長い矩形状の単位波面分割面を有し、前記補正ユニットは前記照明瞳において前記照明光学系の光軸を挟んで前記所定方向と直交する方向に間隔を隔てた一対の領域からの光に作用するように位置決めされていることを特徴とする請求項33に記載の照明光学系。 The optical integrator has a rectangular unit wavefront dividing surface that is elongated along a predetermined direction, and the correction unit is spaced apart in the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction across the optical axis of the illumination optical system at the illumination pupil. The illumination optical system according to claim 33, wherein the illumination optical system is positioned so as to act on light from the pair of regions. 光源からの光で被照射面を照明する照明光学系において、
 オプティカルインテグレータを有し、該オプティカルインテグレータよりも後側の照明瞳に瞳強度分布を形成する分布形成光学系と、
 前記後側の照明瞳を含む前記照明瞳空間に配置された請求項1乃至32のいずれか1項に記載の補正ユニットとを備え、
 前記オプティカルインテグレータは所定方向に沿って細長い矩形状の単位波面分割面を有し、前記所定方向は前記補正ユニットにおける第1方向に対応していることを特徴とする照明光学系。
In the illumination optical system that illuminates the illuminated surface with light from the light source,
A distribution forming optical system having an optical integrator and forming a pupil intensity distribution in an illumination pupil on the rear side of the optical integrator;
The correction unit according to any one of claims 1 to 32, which is disposed in the illumination pupil space including the illumination pupil on the rear side,
The optical integrator has an elongated rectangular unit wavefront dividing surface along a predetermined direction, and the predetermined direction corresponds to a first direction in the correction unit.
前記被照射面上での照度分布または前記被照射面上に形成される照明領域の形状を変更する光量分布調整部をさらに備えることを特徴とする請求項33乃至35のいずれか1項に記載の照明光学系。 36. The light quantity distribution adjustment unit for changing an illuminance distribution on the irradiated surface or a shape of an illumination area formed on the irradiated surface, according to any one of claims 33 to 35. Lighting optics. 前記光量分布調整部は、前記補正ユニットによる前記被照射面上の光量分布への影響を補正することを特徴とする請求項36に記載の照明光学系。 The illumination optical system according to claim 36, wherein the light quantity distribution adjustment unit corrects an influence on the light quantity distribution on the irradiated surface by the correction unit. 前記被照射面と光学的に共役な面を形成する投影光学系と組み合わせて用いられ、前記照明瞳は前記投影光学系の開口絞りと光学的に共役な位置であることを特徴とする請求項33乃至37のいずれか1項に記載の照明光学系。 The projection pupil is used in combination with a projection optical system that forms a surface optically conjugate with the irradiated surface, and the illumination pupil is at a position optically conjugate with an aperture stop of the projection optical system. The illumination optical system according to any one of 33 to 37. 前記分布形成光学系は、前記オプティカルインテグレータに隣接する照明瞳に前記瞳強度分布を形成し、
 前記補正ユニットは前記隣接する照明瞳に配置されることを特徴とする請求項33乃至38のいずれか1項に記載の照明光学系。
The distribution forming optical system forms the pupil intensity distribution in an illumination pupil adjacent to the optical integrator;
The illumination optical system according to any one of claims 33 to 38, wherein the correction unit is arranged in the adjacent illumination pupil.
前記分布形成光学系は、前記オプティカルインテグレータからの光を導いて前記後側の照明瞳に瞳強度分布を形成するリレー光学系を備え、
 前記補正ユニットは、前記後側の照明瞳を含む前記照明瞳空間に配置されることを特徴とする請求項33乃至38のいずれか1項に記載の照明光学系。
The distribution forming optical system includes a relay optical system that guides light from the optical integrator to form a pupil intensity distribution on the rear illumination pupil,
The illumination optical system according to any one of claims 33 to 38, wherein the correction unit is disposed in the illumination pupil space including the rear illumination pupil.
前記リレー光学系は、前記オプティカルインテグレータに隣接する照明瞳と光学的に共役な位置を前記後側の照明瞳に形成することを特徴とする請求項40に記載の照明光学系。 41. The illumination optical system according to claim 40, wherein the relay optical system forms a position optically conjugate with an illumination pupil adjacent to the optical integrator in the rear illumination pupil. 所定のパターンを照明するための請求項33乃至41のいずれか1項に記載の照明光学系を備え、前記所定のパターンを感光性基板に露光することを特徴とする露光装置。 42. An exposure apparatus comprising the illumination optical system according to any one of claims 33 to 41 for illuminating a predetermined pattern, and exposing the predetermined pattern onto a photosensitive substrate. 前記所定のパターンの像を前記感光性基板上に形成する投影光学系を備え、該投影光学系に対して前記所定のパターンおよび前記感光性基板を走査方向に沿って相対移動させて、前記所定のパターンを前記感光性基板へ投影露光することを特徴とする請求項42に記載の露光装置。 A projection optical system for forming an image of the predetermined pattern on the photosensitive substrate, and moving the predetermined pattern and the photosensitive substrate relative to the projection optical system along a scanning direction to 44. The exposure apparatus according to claim 42, wherein the pattern is projected and exposed onto the photosensitive substrate. 前記オプティカルインテグレータにおける前記所定方向は、前記走査方向と直交する方向に対応していることを特徴とする請求項43に記載の露光装置。 44. The exposure apparatus according to claim 43, wherein the predetermined direction in the optical integrator corresponds to a direction orthogonal to the scanning direction. 請求項42乃至44のいずれか1項に記載の露光装置を用いて、前記所定のパターンを前記感光性基板に露光する露光工程と、
 前記所定のパターンが転写された前記感光性基板を現像し、前記所定のパターンに対応する形状のマスク層を前記感光性基板の表面に形成する現像工程と、
 前記マスク層を介して前記感光性基板の表面を加工する加工工程とを含むことを特徴とするデバイス製造方法。
An exposure step of exposing the predetermined pattern to the photosensitive substrate using the exposure apparatus according to any one of claims 42 to 44;
Developing the photosensitive substrate to which the predetermined pattern is transferred, and forming a mask layer having a shape corresponding to the predetermined pattern on the surface of the photosensitive substrate;
And a processing step of processing the surface of the photosensitive substrate through the mask layer.
PCT/JP2009/065309 2008-11-28 2009-09-02 Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure device, and device manufacturing method Ceased WO2010061674A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US19343408P 2008-11-28 2008-11-28
US61/193,434 2008-11-28
US19383108P 2008-12-29 2008-12-29
US61/193,831 2008-12-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2010061674A1 true WO2010061674A1 (en) 2010-06-03

Family

ID=42225554

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2009/065309 Ceased WO2010061674A1 (en) 2008-11-28 2009-09-02 Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure device, and device manufacturing method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI489219B (en)
WO (1) WO2010061674A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010028089A (en) * 2008-07-16 2010-02-04 Nikon Corp Dimming unit, lighting optical system, aligner, and device manufacturing method
JP2010165886A (en) * 2009-01-16 2010-07-29 Nikon Corp Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
CN112015053A (en) * 2019-05-30 2020-12-01 上海微电子装备(集团)股份有限公司 Pupil compensation device and photoetching machine
CN113514910A (en) * 2021-04-13 2021-10-19 长江存储科技有限责任公司 Diffractive optical element, acquisition method and optical system

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105993102B (en) * 2014-09-29 2018-01-30 夏普株式会社 ionizer
JP6771997B2 (en) * 2016-08-24 2020-10-21 キヤノン株式会社 Exposure equipment, exposure method, and article manufacturing method
JP6970548B2 (en) * 2016-09-09 2021-11-24 キヤノン株式会社 Illumination optics, exposure equipment, and article manufacturing methods
CN111352231B (en) * 2018-12-24 2021-10-22 上海微电子装备(集团)股份有限公司 A transmittance adjustment device
TWI747118B (en) * 2019-12-26 2021-11-21 佳世達科技股份有限公司 Imaging module and electronic device

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001135564A (en) * 1999-11-05 2001-05-18 Canon Inc Projection exposure equipment
JP2002100561A (en) * 2000-07-19 2002-04-05 Nikon Corp Exposure method and apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP2002158157A (en) * 2000-11-17 2002-05-31 Nikon Corp Illumination optical apparatus, exposure apparatus, and method for manufacturing microdevice
JP2004056103A (en) * 2002-05-27 2004-02-19 Nikon Corp Illumination optical device, exposure apparatus and exposure method

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
SG107560A1 (en) * 2000-02-25 2004-12-29 Nikon Corp Exposure apparatus and exposure method capable of controlling illumination distribution
TW200307179A (en) * 2002-05-27 2003-12-01 Nikon Corp Lighting device, exposing device and exposing method

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001135564A (en) * 1999-11-05 2001-05-18 Canon Inc Projection exposure equipment
JP2002100561A (en) * 2000-07-19 2002-04-05 Nikon Corp Exposure method and apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP2002158157A (en) * 2000-11-17 2002-05-31 Nikon Corp Illumination optical apparatus, exposure apparatus, and method for manufacturing microdevice
JP2004056103A (en) * 2002-05-27 2004-02-19 Nikon Corp Illumination optical device, exposure apparatus and exposure method

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2010028089A (en) * 2008-07-16 2010-02-04 Nikon Corp Dimming unit, lighting optical system, aligner, and device manufacturing method
JP2010165886A (en) * 2009-01-16 2010-07-29 Nikon Corp Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
CN112015053A (en) * 2019-05-30 2020-12-01 上海微电子装备(集团)股份有限公司 Pupil compensation device and photoetching machine
CN113514910A (en) * 2021-04-13 2021-10-19 长江存储科技有限责任公司 Diffractive optical element, acquisition method and optical system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201022855A (en) 2010-06-16
TWI489219B (en) 2015-06-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6086267B2 (en) Illumination optical system, illumination method, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
WO2010061674A1 (en) Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure device, and device manufacturing method
JP2013502703A (en) Polarization conversion unit, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP5541604B2 (en) Illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP5182588B2 (en) Optical integrator, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP2010097975A (en) Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP5326733B2 (en) Illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP5387893B2 (en) Illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP5201061B2 (en) Correction filter, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP5190804B2 (en) Dimming unit, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP5187632B2 (en) Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP5187631B2 (en) Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
TWI480705B (en) Illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP2010182703A (en) Corrective unit, lighting optical system, aligner, and method of manufacturing device
JP2010067943A (en) Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure device, and method of manufacturing device
JP5187636B2 (en) Correction unit, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP2010040617A (en) Optical integrator, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP2010141091A (en) Polarization control unit, lighting optical system, exposure device, and device manufacturing method
JP2010177304A (en) Correction unit, lighting optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP5604813B2 (en) Illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP5672424B2 (en) Projection optical system, exposure apparatus, and device manufacturing method
JP2013165196A (en) Illumination optical system, exposure equipment and method for manufacturing device
JP2010182704A (en) Correction unit, lighting optical system, aligner, and device manufacturing method
JP2011171563A (en) Adjustment unit, illumination optical system, exposure apparatus, and method of manufacturing device
JP2012028543A (en) Illumination optical system, exposure device, and device manufacturing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 09828923

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 09828923

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP